JP6402150B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs an effect using a director.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not to execute a special game based on the establishment of the start condition, the player's expectation that the special game will be executed based on the determination result. Various effects to be enhanced are performed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-183935 A

  However, it has not always been said that an effective performance is always performed on a conventional gaming machine.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect more effectively.

The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.
The gaming machine according to the present invention executes an acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information in response to establishment of an acquisition condition, and whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. Special game determination means for determining the game, and when the determination by the special game determination means is performed, the symbol variation means for notifying the determination result of the determination by displaying the symbol variably and then stopping the display, and the special game determination Prior to the determination by the means, based on the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means, comprising a prior determination means for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game, and an effect control means for controlling the effect, performance control means, on the basis of the determination result of the special game determination means, or the symbols are stopped and displayed after being varying display start of by Ri the symbols in the symbol variation means The predetermined result is notified by executing the predetermined effect, and when the determination result is the predetermined result, the first predetermined effect that does not execute the reach effect or the second predetermined effect that executes the reach effect It is a predetermined effect that can be executed and is executed before a target predetermined effect that is a predetermined effect corresponding to the acquisition information that is the target of the prior determination based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means. during execution of one or more pre-specified effect, Ri executable Nodea intermittently or continuously operating effect of operating the movable won game, before the operation effect is performed, using the movable won game Te is running available-suggestion effect suggests that the there is a possibility that the operation effect is performed, among the plurality of pre-specified presentation, if there is the second predetermined effect, the second It is executed after the predetermined performance The operation effect can be executed during the execution of the first predetermined effect which is a pre-specified effect, and two or more of the plurality of the predetermined predetermined effects are the first predetermined effect, The determination result is to execute the special game when the operation effect is executed at the start timing and when the operation effect is executed at a second start timing different from the first start timing. However, the degree of expectation notified by the target predetermined effect differs.

  According to the said invention, it is possible to produce more effectively.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 A plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the production actor 71 The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. A block diagram showing a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103 The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control board 140 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the decision ratio of whether or not big hit and the type of big hit Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the flow of the effect performed during the variable display of the 1st special symbol in a normal game state. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach ratio corresponding to the 1st special symbol determination in the case of being controlled to a normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the fluctuation pattern of the 1st special symbol in the case of being controlled by the normal gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern for 1st special symbols in a normal game state Explanatory drawing for explaining a configuration example of an enemy character pre-reading effect and its feasibility Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the determination ratio of the timing when enemy character prefetching production is started Time chart illustrating the flow of effects when the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed before 3 changes or before 1 change Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the specific effect aspect of the enemy character prefetch effect performed before 3 fluctuations Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the specific effect of the enemy character prefetching effect performed before 1 change. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the determination ratio about the presence or absence of enemy character prefetching production Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the mode of the various button effects which prompts the player to operate the effect buttons 26 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the determination ratio for every production | presentation aspect of a transition button effect. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the determination ratio for every production aspect of transition production Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the feasibility of an enemy character look-ahead effect when execution of a chance look-ahead effect is determined Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the feasibility of the enemy character look-ahead effect in other embodiment Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and V area | region 195 in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol AC Time chart illustrating the flow of performance in jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is 7 symbols Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect in the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is a set of seven symbols A time chart illustrating the flow of effects in the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is one of the jackpot symbols A to C and the final stop symbol is other than seven symbols The final stop symbol is a symbol pattern other than the seven symbol pattern, and the flow of effects during the 1st to 6th round games related to the jackpot of any of the jackpot symbols A to C, and an example of the effect mode will be described. Illustration for Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the determination ratio for every production aspect of the judgment button effect started from the time of the 7th round game start Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect in jackpot game corresponding to the case where the type of jackpot is jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is other than seven symbols Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect in jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol B Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect in jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol C The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in step S2109 of FIG. 35 and step S2209 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of jackpot determination processing in step S309 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern determination process in step S310 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the game state setting process performed in the game control board 100 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 44 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the prefetch effect setting process in step S135 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command reception processing in step S15 of FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the final stop symbol determination process in step S155 of FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of prefetch effect pattern determination processing in step S156 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of jackpot game command reception processing in step S18 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of round start command reception processing in step S1806 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of effect setting processing during round for other symbols in step S1825 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 54 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S501 of FIG. Flowchart showing details of timer interrupt processing performed in lamp control board 150 Configuration example in another embodiment in which a plurality of opening patterns of the big winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are prepared in advance for one jackpot symbol

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an upper plate 28 and a lower plate 29 provided below the upper plate 28. The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to a launching device (not shown). The lower plate 29 stores game balls as prize balls that are paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. A take-out button 23 is arranged close to the lower plate 29. When the player operates the take-out button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are moved to the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown) arranged below 29. In other embodiments, the upper plate 28 and the lower plate 29 may be configured as a single plate.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player holds the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game ball guided from the upper plate 28 to the launching device plays with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the lever 21. Fired to the upper position in region 10. The game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls change along the game board 2 while changing their moving direction by contacting the game nails, windmills, etc. Fall. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the lever 21 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched from the launching device with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched from the launching device with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and determining role. Further, in the passage path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, and the electric tulip 17 are used as the winning and determination-related items. Is provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And can win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start port 11 is a start port that is always open, and the second start port 12 is a start port that is opened only when the electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory is operating. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins through the second start port 12, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”. Further, the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 may be collectively referred to as “start port”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a winning opening that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the special winning opening 13 is provided at the opening of the special winning opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. During the big hit game, a round game in which the above-mentioned plate is operated to open the big winning opening 13 is executed. As a result, the special winning opening 13 temporarily changes from a difficult entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter to an easy entry state in which entry is easy. The player can obtain more prize balls than when no jackpot game is performed by making a right hit during the jackpot game and winning the game balls at the jackpot 13. As will be described in detail later, the number of round games and the opening pattern of the big prize opening 13 are predetermined according to the type of jackpot (described later).

  In the present embodiment, as the round game, a short open round game in which the big winning opening 13 is opened shortly or a long open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened long is executed. In the short open round game in which the big winning opening 13 is opened shortly, the big winning opening 13 is kept until the first opening period (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 13 is opened. It is closed after being kept open. In the short open round game, since the open period of the grand prize opening 13 is relatively short, basically, no game ball is won in the big prize opening 13. In the long open round game in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened long, a second opening period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 29 seconds) longer than the first opening period elapses after the grand prize opening 13 is opened, or Until the condition that nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 13 is satisfied, the big prize opening 13 is maintained in an open state and then closed.

  As will be described in detail later, for example, a V region 195 (see FIG. 1) is provided inside the special winning opening 13 so as to be visible to the player. The V region 195 is a region that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination, and is a region that is normally closed by a blade member (not shown) that can rotate with the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axial direction. . In a state in which the V region 195 is closed, even if a round game that opens the big prize opening 13 is performed during the big hit game and the game ball enters the big prize opening 13, the game ball is lost by the blade member. Guided to the area. In this embodiment, during the jackpot game, the blade member maintains the open posture in which the V region 195 is opened for a set time (for example, 29.5 seconds), and then returns to the closed posture in which the V region 195 is closed. Therefore, the game ball can pass through the V region 195 while the special winning opening 13 is opened and the V region 195 is opened by the blade member.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the V area 195 passes through the V area 195 by operating the plate that opens and closes the special prize opening 13 and the blade member that opens and closes the V area 195 at the same time. It temporarily changes from a difficult passage difficult state to an easy passage easy state.

  In another embodiment, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 13 has elapsed, the blade member maintains an open posture in which the V region 195 is opened for a set time (for example, 10 seconds). You may return to the closed attitude | position which obstruct | occludes the V area | region 195.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed posture in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1), and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). The posture can be changed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second start port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily passed by the operation of the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

[Variation production]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects may be executed on condition that a game ball has won the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. In the following description, among the effects executed on condition that a game ball has won at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12, effects other than the effect executed during the jackpot game are collectively referred to as “variable”. It shall be called “production”. Also, the base (scenario) of various effects based on the determination result of the special symbol determination among effects included in the variable effects is referred to as a “variable effect pattern”. Details of the effects included in the variable effects will be described later.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25 and the like for performing various effects. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is provided with a stage effect 71, and the frame member 3 includes a frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 5).

  The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays effect images. As shown in FIG. 1, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter also referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position where it can be easily seen by the player. On the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, an effect image including various display objects such as a decorative symbol that notifies the determination result of the special symbol determination and a hold icon that is displayed as many as the number of special symbol determinations being held is displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a blinking symbol image (not shown) that is blinked during special symbol display (described later) and stopped during special symbol stop display is displayed at the screen edge of the liquid crystal screen 5. The For example, even if a part (or most part) of the liquid crystal screen 5 is covered with a director 71 described in detail later (see, for example, FIG. 4C), this blinking symbol image is always visible to the player. Displayed in position. Thereby, it can be shown whether the special symbol is variably displayed.

  The speaker 24 produces an effect by sound by outputting effect sounds such as music, sound, and sound effects in synchronism with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or asynchronously. The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing a lighting or blinking pattern and changing a light emission color.

[Configuration example of input means]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to input. The effect buttons 26 and the effect keys 27 are used for various effects in addition to being used for various setting operations of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As will be described in detail later, when the effect button 26 is operated during a button effect that prompts the player to operate (for example, press) the effect button 26, the effect is started according to the operation (for example, FIG. ) And (I)). When other input means (for example, the effect key 27) is operated during the button effect, the same effect as when the effect button 26 is operated may be executed or different depending on the operation. Other effects may be executed or no effects may be executed. As an example, in response to the operation key 27 being operated during the button effect, an effect suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed by causing the frame lamp 37 to emit rainbow colors may be performed.

  The effect button 26 is driven by an effect driving device 261 (see FIG. 5), and is configured such that its height can be changed between a normal state and a protruding state. Here, the normal state is a state in which, for example, the upper surface of the effect button 26 is substantially the same as the upper surface of the frame member 3 or at a slightly protruding height. The effect button 26 is kept in a normal state when not being driven by the effect driving device 261. The protruding state is a state in which, for example, the upper surface of the effect button 26 protrudes upward by a predetermined height (for example, 10 cm) with respect to the upper surface of the frame member 3. The effect button 26 can be operated at any height between the normal state and the protruding state.

  Further, the effect button 26 has a built-in button lamp 262 (see FIG. 5) constituted by a light emitting element (for example, LED). For example, the button is displayed during an effective period when the operation of the effect button 26 by the player is valid. By causing the lamp 262 to emit light, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 26.

  The production key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. The up key for instructing up, the down key for instructing down, the left key for instructing left, It consists of a right key for indicating the right.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the first A special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game state indicator 47, a round indicator 48 and the like are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of jackpot symbols indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big win”, and at least 1 indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing” Two lost symbols are predetermined.

  In the present embodiment, the type of jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot are uniquely associated. It is difficult for a player to determine the type of jackpot at first glance. For this reason, many players have difficulty in recognizing the type of jackpot based on the type of jackpot symbol that has been stopped, and can recognize or guess the type of jackpot by looking at the effects and the like performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal screen 5. there's a possibility that.

  In the following description, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as “first special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as “second special symbol”.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when a big hit game is being played, even if a new game ball wins the first starting port 11, the first special is triggered by this winning. The symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be executed immediately. In such a case, the first special symbol determination is suspended within a range that does not exceed a predetermined number (for example, four), and the number of suspension is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 43. The same applies to the second special symbol determination. When both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination.

  In another embodiment, the special symbol determination suspension may be digested in the order in which game balls win the first start port 11 and the second start port 12.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. In the following description, the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 are referred to as “ordinary symbols”. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination.

  The gaming state display 47 displays the gaming state at the start of power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the round indicator 48 displays the number of round games according to the type of the jackpot symbol (hereinafter referred to as “maximum number of round games”). (Rmax) ") is displayed.

[Description of gaming state]
In the present embodiment, “low probability state” and “high probability state” are prepared in advance as the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the special symbol determination. The “low probability state” is a state in which the probability that a jackpot is determined is set to a relatively low probability (eg, 1/320). In addition, the “high probability state” is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/108) compared to the low probability state.

  In addition, “non-short-time state” and “non-time-short state” are prepared in advance as the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the normal symbol determination. The “non-time-short state” is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/12) that the probability of determining that the second start port 12 is to be opened in the normal symbol determination is set, and the normal symbol variation time is relatively long. (For example, 25 seconds). The non-time-short state is a state in which the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when it is determined to open the second start port 12 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time). . On the other hand, the “time-short state” is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1 / 1.1) that the probability that it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened in the normal symbol determination is set as compared with the non-time-short state. In this state, the symbol variation time is set to a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds). Moreover, the time-short state is a state in which the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when it is determined to open the second start port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.8 seconds × 3 times). That is, the time-saving state is a gaming state in which a game ball is more likely to win the second start port 12 than the non-time-saving state. In the short time state, the special symbol variation time may be set to a relatively short time compared to the non-short time state.

  In the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high probability state or a low probability state and is set to a time-short state. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, it is set to a low probability state and a non-time-short state. In the following description, the high probability state and the short time state are referred to as “probability changing gaming state”, the low probability state and the short time state are referred to as “time short gaming state”, and the low probability state and the non-short time state are referred to as “normal gaming state”.

  In other embodiments, at a predetermined timing at the end of the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game (for example, immediately after the special symbol is stopped and displayed 50 times without being determined to be a jackpot), the high probability state and the non-time-short state are entered. A jackpot to be set may be provided in advance.

[Director 71]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, an example of an operation mode of the director 71 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a director 71 that is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and performs various effects by both or one of movement and light of the director.

  In the present embodiment, a decorative member (not shown) with decoration is provided so as to cover the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5. Then, the effect actor 71 is driven by, for example, an effect driving device 261 and operates between the decorative member and the liquid crystal screen 5 in the width direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (left and right direction with respect to the player) (this embodiment). In this case, the slide movement is possible.

  FIG. 4A is a diagram illustrating a state in which the constituent members that make up the rendering accessory 71 are stored at an initial position where the player cannot visually recognize (or is difficult to visually recognize). In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 4C, the director 71 is composed of four constituent members 71aL, 71aR, 71bL, and 71bR. Each component has a pattern imitating a plurality of enemy characters (hereinafter referred to as “enemy characters”). In the initial position, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the component member 71aL is disposed so as to overlap the front surface side of the component member 71bL, and the component member 71aR is disposed so as to overlap the front surface side of the component member 71bR. For example, between the decorative member and the liquid crystal screen 5, the left side of the liquid crystal screen 5 is the initial position of the constituent members 71aL and 71bL, and the right side of the liquid crystal screen 5 is the initial position of the constituent members 71aR and 71bR ( (See FIG. 4A). Each component is configured to be able to operate independently between the initial position and the “advance position” (see FIGS. 4B and 4C). The “advance position” is a position where a component having an initial position on the left side of the liquid crystal screen 5 and a component having an initial position on the right side of the liquid crystal screen 5 are arranged close to each other on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIG. 4C).

  For example, when it is time to operate the production actor 71, each component of the production actor 71 moves to the advance position. In the present embodiment, the director 71 is configured to be able to perform a stepwise operation, and the constituent members 71bL and 71bR advance to the advance position after the constituent members 71aL and 71aR advance. After that, when it is time to return the production character 71 to the initial position, the production character 71 returns from the advanced position to the initial position. As each constituent member moves from the initial position to the advanced position, a portion where each constituent member and the liquid crystal screen 5 overlap increases. When the director 71 is arranged at the advance position, most (or a part) of the liquid crystal screen 5 is covered with the director 71, so that the director image 71 (eg, the director) is not operated. The display area in which the decorative pattern) can be displayed in a visible manner is reduced.

  In addition, the effect actor 71 includes a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED, and emits light with light emission patterns corresponding to various effects. In the present embodiment, a plurality of light emission colors (for example, white, red, and rainbow colors) are prepared in advance as the light emission colors of the effect actor 71.

  In other embodiments, the number of components constituting the director 71 is not limited to four. For example, the director may be composed of four or less (for example, one) component members, or four or more. You may be comprised from the structural member (for example, six). Moreover, in other embodiment, each structural member may be comprised so that it may operate | move in conjunction with the other structural member being driven by the drive device 261 for production, and as an example, the structural member 71bL is You may operate | move depending on operation | movement of the structural member 71aL.

  Moreover, in other embodiment, the production | presentation actor 71 may be arrange | positioned in the position which a player can visually recognize the one part or all part when it does not operate | move. In this case, for example, a position (for example, the state of FIG. 4B) that is the front surface of the liquid crystal screen 5 and that does not reduce the visibility of the liquid crystal screen 5 as much as possible may be set as the initial position of the effect actor 71. By arranging in this way, the effect of the game can be improved by the effect agent 71 even when it is not in operation, such as by causing the decoration applied to the effect agent 71 to emit light with light emission patterns corresponding to various effects. Can do.

  Moreover, in other embodiment, the production | presentation actor 71 may be provided so that reversal (reversal, such as a front surface and a back surface changing) is possible. In this case, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving an effect to reverse the effect actor 71 during the game by decorating the back surface. As an example, a pattern with a motif other than an enemy character (for example, a character or a vehicle on the player side) may be provided on the back surface. In such a case, if the reliability (which will be described later) for the jackpot is relatively low, the stage actor 71 is operated in a state where the player can visually recognize the surface, and if the reliability is relatively high, the player The director 71 may be operated in a state in which the back surface is visible.

  Moreover, in other embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a director 130 (or a director different from the director 71) disposed behind the liquid crystal screen 5 may be provided. As an example, a liquid crystal display device having a transparency in which the liquid crystal screen 5 can switch a rear region between a first state that is visible in front view and a second state that is not visible (or difficult to view) in front view. The case of (so-called transmissive liquid crystal) will be described. For example, when it is time to operate the stage actor 71, the stage actor 71 is operated behind the liquid crystal screen 5. At the same time, in the liquid crystal screen 5, only a specific part of the director 71 is given to the player by causing the specific part of the director 71 (for example, the constituent member 71bL) to overlap with the first state. It is possible to produce a visual effect. When an effect that makes it possible to visually recognize most (or a part) of the effect agent 71 is performed, most (or a part) of the liquid crystal screen 5 is in the first state, and an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern) can be visually recognized. The display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 that can be displayed is reduced.

  In another embodiment, the surface of the director 71 is configured by a light guide plate, and is used as a decorative member or the like via a groove that guides light formed in a predetermined pattern (for example, a pattern imitating an enemy character). Light may be emitted by light of the light emitting element provided. Further, the effect agent 71 may be caused to emit light by the effect image light displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as the background of the effect agent 71.

  Further, in other embodiments, the effect agent 71 may be an image display device that can operate in the same manner as the effect agent 71 and displays an effect image.

[Configuration example of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a control device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game, such as various determinations and command transmission, and the effects based on the commands received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 for controlling an effect, an image sound control board 140 for controlling an effect by an image and sound, a lamp control board 150 for controlling an effect by various lamps and an effect agent 71, and the like. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured as one board.

[Game control board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and a random number circuit 104. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing. The random number circuit 104 generates, for example, an initial value of a jackpot random number used to determine a jackpot or loss in the jackpot determination (described later).

  As illustrated in FIG. 5, the game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a gate switch 114, a big winning port switch 115, and a V winning port switch 116. The discharge switch 117, the big prize opening control section 118, the V winning opening control section 119, the normal winning opening switch 120, and the respective indicators 41 to 48 constituting the display 4 are connected.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving. To do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The normal winning opening switch 120 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning opening 14 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. In the present embodiment, since there are four ordinary winning opening 14 (see FIG. 1), four ordinary winning opening switches 120 are provided. In FIG. 4, only one ordinary winning opening switch 120 is shown. Yes.

  Based on a control signal from the game control board 100, the special prize opening control unit 118 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so as to be able to transmit driving. To do. Based on a control signal from the game control board 100, the V winning opening control unit 119 opens and closes the V region by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a blade member that opens and closes the V region 195 so as to be able to transmit driving.

  The big prize opening switch 115 detects a game ball won in the big prize opening 13. The game ball that has passed through the big prize opening switch 115 is guided to the V area 195 or the lost area (not shown) by a blade member (not shown) provided inside the special prize opening 13. The V winning opening switch 116 detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 195. In the present embodiment, the fact that the V winning switch 116 detects that a game ball has passed through the V area 195 is also referred to as “V winning”. The discharge switch 117 detects a game ball that has passed through the lost area. When a game ball is detected by these switches, the detection signal is output to the game control board 100. In the present embodiment, when a game ball that has won the big prize opening 13 during the jackpot game is detected by the V prize opening switch 116, the gaming state immediately after the end of the big hit game is a probabilistic gaming state (high probability state and short time state). Set to

  In other embodiments, the V prize opening switch 116 may be provided downstream of the V area 195 or in the V area 195, and the discharge switch 117 is provided downstream of the loss area or in the loss area. Also good.

(An example of an outline of control according to the detection signal input from various switches)
When the detection signal from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, or the normal winning port switch 120 is input, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a game ball. The payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out prize balls according to the place, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board. Although a detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies the game ball to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the ball tank.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as “random numbers for special symbol determination” as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and uses the acquired various random numbers to obtain the first special symbol. Make a decision.

  In the present embodiment, for example, a jackpot random number, a design random number, a variation pattern random number, and a reach random number are used as the “special symbol determination random number”. The jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot symbol (that is, the type of jackpot) when it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot. The variation pattern random number is used to determine a variation time (hereinafter also referred to as “variation pattern”), which is a time from when a special symbol starts to display a variation until it is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination. It is a random number. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether or not to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol from the fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less when it is determined that the reach is lost. These random numbers are generated using, for example, random counters provided in the random number circuit 104 and the main RAM 103. Note that random numbers other than those described above may be used to enhance the effect.

  In addition, the main CPU 101 acquires the above-described special symbol determination random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and performs the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Run. When the determination result of the special symbol determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the big prize opening 13 and the V area 195 via the big prize opening control unit 118 and the V prize opening control unit 119 and executes the big hit game. To do.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a normal symbol random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes a normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. When it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened, the second start port 12 is temporarily opened by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113.

(Configuration example of main RAM 103)
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration example of the main RAM 103 in the game control board 100 and various kinds of information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 6, the main RAM 103 includes a determination storage area 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, a fourth reserved storage area 1034, a first A reserved storage area 1035, a second reserved storage area 1036, a third reserved storage area 1037, and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

  The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are stored in which various information related to the first special symbol determination is stored in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 every time a game ball wins the first start port 11. It is an area. The first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are stored in which various information relating to the second special symbol determination is stored in order from the first reserved storage area 1035 every time a game ball wins the second starting port 12. It is an area.

  For example, when a special symbol is variably displayed, or even if a game ball wins at the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 during a jackpot game, the special symbol determination or the special symbol variation display is performed immediately. Can not. Under such circumstances, the main CPU 101 stores various information related to the special symbol determination in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 as information indicating that the special symbol determination is suspended. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not variably displayed, the special symbol determination is not suspended, and the game is not in the big hit game, the main CPU 101 starts the starting point where the game ball has won the various random numbers obtained. Immediately after being stored in the first reserved storage area (1031 or 1035) corresponding to, the shift to the determination storage area 1030 is performed.

  For example, when a game ball wins the first start port 11 in a state where no information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the first special symbol acquired by the winning is obtained. Various types of information relating to the determination are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 which is the highest level of the empty entries. In addition, for example, when a game ball wins the first starting port 11 in a state where information is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, the first special symbol determination acquired by the winning is used. Such various types of information are stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 which is the highest level of the empty entries.

  For example, “preliminary determination information” is also stored in the hold storage areas 1031 to 1038. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the starting opening, a prior determination is made to determine whether or not a big hit prior to the special symbol determination based on the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. This is performed (step S2109 in FIG. 35, step S2209 in FIG. 37). The advance determination information is information obtained by this advance determination. Pre-determined information includes, specifically, winning start information, information indicating whether or not the jackpot, information indicating the type of jackpot symbol (that is, type of jackpot) in the case of jackpot, variation of special symbol Information indicating a pattern, information indicating a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like are included. Here, the winning start opening information is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 with the jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area. Information indicating whether or not the game ball has been acquired by winning the second start port 12. Prior determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used for the prior determination.

  In the present embodiment, the “pre-reading effect” is executed based on the prior determination information obtained by the prior determination, the prior determination information related to the special symbol determination previously suspended, and the aspect of the currently performed effect. The The pre-reading effect is, for example, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation for the jackpot of the special symbol determination corresponding to the target of prior determination (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reading target”). The pre-reading effect is, for example, an effect that is determined to be executed from when the game ball wins the starting opening until a special symbol determination based on the winning is executed, and can be executed even during a jackpot game. . In the present embodiment, an effect other than the prefetch effect executed during the jackpot game among the prefetch effects is an effect included in the variation effect. In the present embodiment, for example, an enemy character pre-reading effect and a chance look-ahead effect described later are prepared in advance as the pre-reading effects included in the variation effect. These two prefetch effects are started during the special symbol variation display corresponding to the special symbol determination (hereinafter, also referred to as “start target”) executed before the special symbol determination relating to the prefetch target. The enemy character pre-reading effect and the chance eye pre-reading effect are finished until the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination relating to the pre-reading object is stopped and displayed without the big hit game being performed.

  When the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is performed, the information stored in the entry lower than the second reserved storage area 1031 is 1 Each entry is shifted up. For example, when information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 in a state where information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, The information stored in the second reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

  Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in which information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are held, that is, information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. Is stored, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is preferentially performed prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034. Therefore, when the second special symbol determination is held in the determination storage area 1030, various information stored in the first hold storage area 1035 is shifted. Further, when the second special symbol determination is not suspended, that is, when only the first special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

[Production control board 130]
As illustrated in FIG. 5, the effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, an RTC (real time clock) 134, and a random number circuit 135. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (current date and time).

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 131 sets the contents of various effects based on game information related to special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, and the like transmitted from the game control board 100. For the determination of the effect content, for example, various random numbers for effect control generated using a random counter provided in the random number circuit 135 or the sub RAM 133 are used.

[Lamp control board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 performs control of an effect driving device 261 (for example, a stepping motor) that operates the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, and the effect agent 71 based on a program stored in the lamp ROM 152. The arithmetic processing is performed. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or a work area such as data processing.

  The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating each light emission pattern of the light emitting elements incorporated in the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect button 26, the effect agent 71 and the like. The motion pattern data is data indicating, for example, the motion pattern of the effect button 26 and the operation patterns of the constituent members 71aL, 71aR, 71bL, and 71bR that constitute the effect accessory 71.

  For example, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data for operation and the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 and temporarily stores them in the lamp RAM 153. Thereafter, when a command instructing the start of the effect is received from the image sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130, the lamp CPU 151 controls the effect actor 71 and the like with the pattern stored in the lamp RAM 153.

[Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal screen 5 and effect sound output control of the speaker 24. As illustrated in FIG. 7, the image sound control board 140 includes a central CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, a sound ROM 146, and an SDRAM 147. , CGROM 148, and VRAM 149.

  The overall CPU 141 stores image data stored in the CGROM 148 with respect to the VDP 142 based on programs stored in the control ROM 144, various tables such as a display list creation table, commands received from the effect control board 130, and the like. Give instructions to display. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list creation table is a table used for creating this display list.

  The overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 144 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 141 and a display list generation program for generating a display list.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data necessary for executing a change effect, an effect associated with a jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores, without compressing, palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is an SRAM that can write and read image data at a high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493, and the like.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 148 and expanded. The liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 is used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 is a double buffer type memory having two buffers. While the image data stored in one buffer is being output for display, the next image data is stored in the other buffer. By drawing, image data is drawn and displayed.

  The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. The VDP 142 performs a drawing process on the liquid crystal screen frame buffer 1493 using the image data stored in the expanded storage area 1492 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer in the VRAM 149, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the liquid crystal screen 5.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 143 are an acoustic ROM 146 for storing various acoustic data relating to music, voice, sound effects, etc., an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143, and an amplifier 1431. The acoustic DSP 143 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24 (via the amplifier 1431). The amplifier 1431 adjusts the volume according to an instruction regarding the volume obtained from the overall CPU 141 via the acoustic DSP 143 and causes the speaker 24 to output acoustic data. Although detailed description is omitted, the sound DSP 143 has a three-dimensional sound effect in which a production sound can be heard from a position of a virtually formed sound source other than the position where the speaker 24 is installed, for example, in accordance with an instruction from the overall CPU 141. The sound data corresponding to the effect sound can be output.

  In this embodiment, the case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP is responsible for sound management will be described. However, in other embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. May be. In this case, there is no need to separately provide an acoustic DSP.

  So far, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described based on FIGS. 1 to 7, but the configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 7 is merely an example, and other configurations may be used.

[Various determinations made on the game control board 100]
Next, various determinations performed on the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 10 to 12. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the jackpot is large and the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, for example, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination based on various random numbers for special symbol determination acquired when a game ball is won at the start opening. The main ROM 102 stores in advance determination values for comparison with various random number values for special symbol determination.

  First, an example of the determination ratio in the jackpot determination (see FIG. 39) will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101 uses, for example, a jackpot random number acquired when a game ball is won at the start opening and a jackpot determination table (not shown), and determines whether the jackpot determination is “big hit” or “lost”. It is determined before the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified. The jackpot determination table is a table in which, for example, a determination value to be compared with a jackpot random number is assigned in advance to either “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the jackpot determination table, the allocation of the determination value for the determination result of “big hit” differs depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a low probability state or a high probability state.

  In the determination ratio illustrated in FIG. 8A, when the low probability state is set, it is determined that the jackpot is a probability of 1/320, and is determined to be a loss of a probability of 319/320. Specifically, for example, when “0 to 65535” is set as the determination value, “65331 to 65535” is defined as the determination value to be determined to be a big hit in the low probability jackpot determination table, “0 to 65330” is determined as a determination value for determining that On the other hand, when the high probability state is set, a jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/108, and a loss is determined with a probability of 107/108. Specifically, for example, when “0 to 65535” is set as the determination value, “64928 to 65535” is defined as the determination value to be determined to be a big hit in the high probability hourly jackpot determination table. “0-64927” is determined as a determination value for determining that.

  Next, an example of the type of jackpot symbol and the determination ratio thereof will be described with reference to FIG. When the determination result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 uses, for example, the symbol random number acquired when the game ball wins the start opening and the symbol determination table (not shown) to perform the special symbol determination. The type of jackpot symbol is determined before the determination result is notified. As a result, the type of jackpot is determined. The symbol determination table is, for example, a table in which a determination value to be compared with a symbol random number is assigned in advance to a jackpot symbol. In the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot symbol differs depending on whether the special symbol relating to the special symbol determination is the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see FIG. 8B).

  For example, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol is determined as jackpot symbol A at a rate of 40%, determined as jackpot symbol B at a rate of 10%, and at a rate of 50% The jackpot symbol C is determined (see FIG. 8B). Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, “0 to 39” is determined as the determination value determined as the jackpot symbol A in the symbol determination table. Further, “40 to 49” is determined as the determination value determined as the jackpot symbol B, and “50 to 99” is determined as the determination value determined as the jackpot symbol C.

  When the type of the jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol A or B, it is described as a winning ball equivalent to the case where ten long open round games are actually played (hereinafter referred to as “substantial winning ball for ten rounds”). ) Is a big hit game. When the jackpot symbol A or B is determined, the V area 195 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol C is determined, the V region 195 is short-opened (for example, 0.2 seconds) in a manner that makes it difficult to win a V-win during the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot symbol is not long-opened). Similar to A and B, a jackpot game is performed in which prize balls for 10 rounds (hereinafter referred to as “R”) are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, on the condition of V winning, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state (high probability state and short time state). The jackpot symbols A and B are easier to win the V jackpot than the jackpot symbol A and B where the V region 195 is opened long than the jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol C) where the V region 195 is opened short. The jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot symbol C. Note that the jackpot symbols A and B are jackpots with the same number of winning balls, and are a jackpot that allows the V region 195 to be opened long so that it is easy to win a V, so there is no difference in advantage for the player.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot game corresponding to a jackpot (for example, jackpot symbols A and B) in which the V region 195 is long open is executed, basically a V prize is won. Then, when winning V, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state. If, for example, 150 special symbol determinations are made after the transition to the probable gaming state, but it is not determined that the jackpot game is executed once, the determination result (losing) of the 150th special symbol determination is shown. Immediately after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability state and non-time-short state).

  In this embodiment, when a jackpot game corresponding to a jackpot (for example, jackpot symbol C) in which the V region 195 is opened short is executed, basically no V prize is won during the jackpot game. If no V prize is won, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the short-time gaming state (low probability state and short-time state). In addition, even if the V area 195 is a big hit that is long open, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the game is controlled in the short-time game state immediately after the jackpot game ends. For example, even if 100 special symbol determinations are made after the transition to the short-time gaming state, if it is not determined that the jackpot game is executed once, the determination result (losing) of the 100th special symbol determination is shown. Immediately after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state.

  In this embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol is determined to be a jackpot symbol D at a rate of 100%, as illustrated in FIG. 8B. Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, all the determination values are assigned to the jackpot symbol D in the symbol determination table. The jackpot symbol D is a jackpot in which the V region 195 is long-opened so that 16R prize balls can be obtained because 16 long-opening round games are performed, and it is easy to win V. For this reason, when a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol D is executed, basically a V prize is won during the jackpot game. When winning V, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is set to the probability variation gaming state. Thus, in this embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special symbol determination is set in advance so that it is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the first special symbol determination.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, during the jackpot game, an effect (for example, a judge described later) is made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot game advantageous to the player is won. Production) may be executed. More specifically, there may be an effect during the jackpot game where attention is paid to whether or not the game state immediately after the jackpot game ends is a jackpot that is set to the probability variation game state. Here, if there is a difference in the number of winning balls that can be obtained by executing the jackpot game depending on whether or not the V region 195 is long open, the player guesses or recognizes the type of jackpot based on the number of winning balls There is a risk of being able to. In such a case, there is a possibility that the interest of the production as described above cannot be improved effectively.

  Therefore, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, when an effect (for example, a judge effect, which will be described later) that draws attention to whether or not the game is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is executed during the jackpot game, "Is not notified. The number of prize balls related to the jackpot game is a concept including the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game.

  However, an information display device (hereinafter referred to as “data counter”) that displays a game history of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be installed above the pachinko gaming machine 1 in some cases. Then, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit game is notified in real time by the data counter. In such a case, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not notify the number of prize balls related to the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the type of jackpot can be estimated based on the number of prize balls displayed on the data counter.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, there is no difference in the number of winning balls that can be obtained by executing the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot Is employed (see FIG. 8B). By adopting such a configuration, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the V region 195 is a big hit that is long open based on the number of winning balls related to the big hit game. Furthermore, even if the number of winning balls is displayed on the data counter, the player cannot guess or recognize the type of jackpot based on the number of winning balls displayed on the data counter. Thereby, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of an effect (for example, a judge effect to be described later) that draws attention whether it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player.

  In other embodiments, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, there may be a difference in the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game depending on the type of jackpot. In such a case, during the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game in which a difference in the number of prize balls will occur, an effect (for example, described later) that draws attention as to whether or not the game is advantageous to the player Judge production) may be executed. In another embodiment, the advantage of the jackpot symbol A and the jackpot symbol B (for example, a winning ball that can be obtained during the jackpot game) if the gaming state immediately after the jackpot game ends is controlled to the probability variation gaming state. There may be a difference in number).

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the jackpot symbol as the determination result of the first special symbol determination is different from the jackpot symbol as the determination result of the second special symbol determination. In other embodiments, each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol as the determination result of the first special symbol determination and each symbol as the determination result of the second special symbol determination may be all common, or may be partially common Good.

  Note that the determination ratio of the determination result and the determination ratio of the jackpot symbol in the jackpot determination illustrated in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and any determination ratio may be used.

[Examples of effects included in variable effects]
In the present embodiment, when the special symbol determination is executed, the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed after the special symbol is variably displayed. On the other hand, the following effects are performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in response to such special symbol variation display and stop display.

  On the liquid crystal screen 5, when the special symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started almost simultaneously. Specifically, on the display screen of the liquid crystal screen 5, for example, there are three rows of decorative symbols consisting of several rows in which 1 symbol to 9 symbols indicating numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction ( Left column, middle column, and right column). In response to the start of the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the left symbol which is the decorative symbol in the left column, the middle symbol which is the decorative symbol in the middle column, And the right symbol, which is the decorative symbol in the right column, is variably displayed so as to scroll from top to bottom, for example. Thereafter, in response to the special symbol being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed on the active line (for example, one horizontal line). Stopped display. When the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big jackpot”, the same decorative symbols as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed to notify the jackpot. On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing”, the decorative symbols that are not the same as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and the loss is notified. A series of effects from the variation display of the decorative symbol to the stop display (determination) is an effect executed based on the determination result of the special symbol determination, and is an effect included in the variation effect.

  In the following description, a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed (determined) in a manner of notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination may be referred to as a “final stop symbol”.

  The decorative design is not limited to numbers, and may be, for example, characters (for example, English characters or kanji), character images imitating predetermined characters (for example, player-side characters), symbols, or combinations of these and numbers.

  In this embodiment, based on the determination result of the special symbol determination, the “reach effect” may be executed during the variation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination. The “reach effect” is an effect included in the variable effect, which is an effect that causes the player to expect a big hit by displaying an effect image different from the decorative design on the liquid crystal screen 5. The reach effect can be executed depending on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and may not be executed. A specific effect aspect of the reach effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the determination result of the special symbol determination, the “notice effect” may be executed during the variation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination. The “notice effect” is, for example, an effect that suggests or notifies that the possibility of a reach effect is relatively high or that the possibility of a big hit is relatively high. The notice effect is an effect included in the variable effect.

[Variation display mode of decorative design]
In the present embodiment, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol may become reach during the special symbol variation display. Here, “reach” means that, for example, the same decorative symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are “pseudo” on the active line before all decorative symbols are stopped (ie, confirmed) in response to the special symbol stop display. "Stopped" and the middle symbol fluctuates. The pseudo stop is, for example, an effect in which the decorative design is finely moved so as to swing up and down on the effective line, and is an effect included in the variation effect.

  In the following description, the left symbol and the right symbol that are pseudo-stopped due to reach establishment may be collectively referred to as “reach symbols”. In the present embodiment, when a reach is established, a reach effect is executed accordingly. The reach effect is also an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that the middle symbol in the variable display will stop at the same symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol. In the present embodiment, the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped during the reach effect may be displayed small on the liquid crystal screen 5, but the reach symbol does not necessarily have to be pseudo-stopped during the reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, when a win is achieved and a reach effect is executed, a decorative symbol having the same combination as the final stop symbol (that is, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are the same during the special symbol variation display). (Decoration pattern) is pseudo-stopped on the active line. After that, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol that has been pseudo-stopped in the jackpot mode in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are the same decorative symbol is displayed on the active line in the jackpot mode. Is stopped. Immediately after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the jackpot game is executed, and various effects according to the type of jackpot symbol are started.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is one of the jackpot symbols A to C and the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is composed of other than seven symbols (for example, one symbol is aligned) Is set in advance so that a big hit effect during the big hit game is made to pay attention to whether or not the big hit is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is composed of seven symbols (that is, seven symbols are aligned), the V region 195 is easily opened for a long time in the V prize, and the V prize is won. As soon as the jackpot game ends, a jackpot effect that informs (or suggests) that a jackpot (in this embodiment, the jackpot symbol A) in which the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state is won is executed during the jackpot game. It is set in advance.

  When it is a loss and the reach effect is executed, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line in a reach loss manner during the special symbol variation display. The reach lose mode is, for example, a mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are the same decorative symbol, and the middle symbol is a different decorative symbol from the left symbol and the right symbol. Thereafter, in response to the losing symbol being stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol that has been pseudo-stopped in the reach-losing manner is stopped and displayed on the active line in the reach-losing manner. Such a decorative symbol variation display mode is referred to as a “reach lose” variation display mode in which the determination result of the special symbol determination is lost.

  In the present embodiment, the reach symbols are set in advance so as to suggest the possibility that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is executed by having seven symbols. For example, at the time of losing, the reach symbol is relatively difficult to be composed of 7 symbols, and is set to be easily composed of other symbols. With such a configuration, when the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols, the player can enjoy the game while expecting a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A to be executed.

  During the reach production, the decorative symbols constituting the reach symbols may be changed. As an example, the reach symbol composed of one symbol at the time of reach establishment may be changed to the reach symbol composed of seven symbols during reach production. In addition, when the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols, it is preferable to set in advance so as not to change to the reach symbol composed of other decorative symbols during the reach effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid disappointing a player who has enjoyed a game while expecting that a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the determination result of the special symbol determination is lost without executing the reach effect. For example, in this case, in response to the fact that the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, three decorative symbols (for example, rosettes) that do not become big hits as the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the active line. It will be stopped later. Such a decorative symbol variation display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” variation display mode in which the determination result of the special symbol determination is lost. It should be noted that the non-reach fluctuation display mode may include a case where the reach effect is not executed after the reach is established and the stop display is performed in a reach-losing mode.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the possibility that a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is executed is notified or notified when the decorative symbol pseudo-stopped in the form of the reach symbol and the jackpot is 7 symbols. In other embodiments, the type of jackpot may not be suggested by the type of reach symbol and the type of decorative symbol pseudo-stopped in a jackpot manner.

  In another embodiment, the game may be set in advance so that the reach symbol is always a big hit when the reach symbol is composed of seven symbols when controlled to a predetermined gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state).

  In another embodiment, when the jackpot symbol A is won, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in a jackpot manner other than the seven symbol matching (hereinafter also referred to as “other symbol matching”) during the special symbol variation display. After that, a promotion effect that changes to a big hit mode with 7 symbols may be executed. In this case, on the condition that the final stop symbol is determined to be 7 symbols, for example, whether the promotion effect is executed by lottery using the promotion random number, which is one of the effect control random numbers, by the effect control board 130 Whether or not may be determined. Specifically, for example, the determination value for comparison with the random number for promotion is set as “0 to 99”, the range of “0 to 29” is “with promotion effect”, and the range of “30 to 99” is When preliminarily assigned to “no promotion effect”, whether or not the promotion effect is executed may be determined depending on which determination result the random number for promotion matches with the determination value assigned to.

  Moreover, the mode of jackpot is not limited to the combination of the same three decorative symbols (for example, a set of seven symbols). In another embodiment, when the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the decoration is performed in the form of a predetermined reach loss or a predetermined chance (for example, a combination of “1”, “3”, and “7”). The symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, the same two decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are arranged on the active line with an interval between them, and a special symbol that informs (or suggests) a jackpot between the two decorative symbols is displayed on the active line. The jackpot may be notified in such a manner as to stop display.

[Direction mode]
In the present embodiment, at least one of the types of executable effects (for example, reach effects), the types of effect images (for example, background images) that can be displayed, and the music that can be output as the “effect mode” during the variable effects. A plurality of different presentation modes are prepared in advance. The effect mode is for “normal mode” when the normal gaming state (low probability state and non-short time state) is set, and for when the probability variation gaming state (high probability state and short time state) is set. There are a “probability mode” and a “short time mode” for when the short time gaming state (low probability state and short time state) is set. In the present embodiment, the following effect image (for example, background image) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the variation effect in which the effect (for example, the reach effect) with relatively high reliability for the jackpot is not executed. The player can determine the current production mode.

  In the normal mode, for example, a landscape image imitating a mountain landscape as a background image is displayed as a background image. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, for example, a battlefield image simulating a battlefield that burns as a background image is displayed, or music that is not output in the normal mode (for example, music that is output during a jackpot game) is output. Further, unlike the normal mode, the probability change mode and the time reduction mode are special modes that can be executed until the effect mode (for example, the probability change mode) is switched to another effect mode (for example, the normal mode) (that is, until it is set to another game state). A remaining number image for notifying the remaining number of symbol determinations is displayed.

  For example, red, purple, and black battlefield images can be displayed as background images in the probability variation mode, while only a red battlefield image can be displayed as a background image in the time reduction mode. Further, the initial value of the remaining number indicated by the remaining number image is “150” in the probability variation mode, and “100” in the time reduction mode. Further, for example, in the probability change mode, the player side character (hereinafter referred to as “friend character”) appears in the background with the battlefield image transformed into a normal state or a strong state with increased power. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, ally characters appear in the normal state against the background of the battlefield image, but do not appear in the appearance after transformation.

  Here, it is suggested that “friend characters” have a relatively high level of expectation for jackpots when they play an active role regardless of the type of production mode, or have a relatively high level of expectation that is advantageous to players. It is a suggested character.

[Flow of performance in normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the flow of effects performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow of effects performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, the right-handed game ball may win the second start opening 12 or the normal winning opening 14 but does not win the first start opening 11. During the probable gaming state or the short-time gaming state, it is easier for a game ball to win the second starting port 12 than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is more likely to win the game ball than the first starting port 11. Easy to win. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state, the player plays the game by right-handed aiming at the second starting port 12.

  On the other hand, during the normal gaming state, the game ball is less likely to win the second starting port 12 than in the probability-changing gaming state or the short-time gaming state, and the first starting port 11 is more playable than the second starting port 12. The ball is easy to win. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the player plays the game by left-handed aiming at the first start port 11. In the following description, the flow of effects performed during the display of variation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described. However, the same effect is also performed during the variation display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to produce different aspects.

  When a game ball wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed. When the determination result of this determination is a loss and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is a variation pattern of a predetermined time or less (13.5 seconds or less in the present embodiment), a decoration corresponding to the variation pattern. A variation effect pattern in which the symbol variation display mode is non-reach is determined. In the production based on this variation production pattern, for example, after the decorative symbol starts to be varied (see FIG. 9A), before the three different decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. A different decorative design as a design stops pseudo. In the case of the non-reach variation display mode in which the determination result of the special symbol determination is a loss, since the reach is not established, the three different decorative symbols are stopped and displayed without any reach effect, and the loss is notified (FIG. 9). (A pattern from (A) to (B)).

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined to be a variation pattern exceeding a predetermined time (13.5 seconds in the present embodiment) based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern Reach production is executed based on the pattern. In the present embodiment, three types of a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, and an SPSP reach effect are prepared in advance as reach effects that can be executed in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol when controlled in the normal gaming state. ing. These reach effects differ in reliability, which is the possibility that a jackpot will be notified thereafter.

  The normal reach effect (see FIG. 9D) is an effect that gradually lowers the scroll speed of the middle symbol, for example, and the left symbol and right symbol in the reach state and the middle symbol in the variable display are liquid crystal. This effect is greatly displayed on the screen 5. The normal reach production is performed, for example, immediately after the reach is established (a pattern that proceeds from (C) to (D) in FIG. 9). In the present embodiment, unlike an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect described later, an effect image in which a character such as an animation is active is not displayed as a normal reach effect. Although the “reliability” is higher than the case where the decorative symbol variation display mode is non-reach, the normal reach effect is an effect that has a relatively low possibility of being a big hit. “Reliability” is the degree of the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is reached, that is, the ratio that is the jackpot, with respect to all the selection ratios including when the jackpot and lose.

  When the normal reach production is performed, in response to the first special symbol being stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed on the active line at the end of the normal reach production and a winning (big hit or lost) may be notified. (Pattern from FIG. 9D to (B)).

  The SP reach effect (see FIG. 9E) is an effect in which, for example, an effect image in which an ally character fights against an enemy character is displayed. In this embodiment, the possibility that the jackpot is notified in the SP reach effect is relatively higher than the possibility that the jackpot is notified in the normal reach effect. That is, the SP reach production is a production with higher reliability for the jackpot than the normal reach production.

  The SP reach production may be performed immediately after the reach is established, or in the middle or the end of the normal reach production (pattern from FIG. 9C or (D) to (E)).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the SP reach effect is performed in such a manner that the SP reach effect is started directly from the enemy character look-ahead effect without reaching the reach (from FIG. 9 (I) ( Pattern to go to E)).

  In the following description, a scenario in which reach production is started through enemy character pre-reading production without passing through reach establishment and normal reach production is referred to as “direct development” (for example, a pattern of proceeding from FIG. 9 (I) to (E) ).

  In the present embodiment, when the SP reach effect is directly developed, the reach symbol is displayed in a small size on the liquid crystal screen 5 when the SP reach effect is started. Further, for example, at the start of execution of the SP reach effect, a title image (not shown) for notifying the title of the SP reach effect is displayed, or an effect image such as “SP” is displayed. It is possible to recognize the direct development.

  When the SP reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed on the active line at the end of the SP reach effect in response to the first special symbol being stopped and displayed (FIG. 9). (Pattern from (E) to (B)).

  The SPSP reach effect is an effect in which, for example, a battle between a CG, animation, or live-action friendly character and an enemy character is developed over a longer time than the SP reach effect. The SPSP reach effect is an effect in which the effect actor 71 may be operated at the start of execution or a title image (not shown) for informing the title of the SPSP reach effect may be displayed. Also, at the start of execution of SPSP reach effect, an effect image such as “SPSP” is displayed, or an effect image for increasing the player's expectation (for example, an effect image for suggesting reliability) is displayed. There is a production. In this embodiment, the possibility that the jackpot is notified in the SPSP reach effect is relatively higher than the possibility that the jackpot is notified in the normal reach effect and the SP reach effect. That is, the SPSP reach production is a production with higher reliability for the jackpot than the normal reach production and the SP reach production.

  The SPSP reach effect is a reach effect that is performed immediately after the reach is established, or in the middle or at the end of the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect.

  When the SPSP reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line at the end of the SPSP reach effect in response to the first special symbol being stopped and displayed (FIG. 9F). To (B)).

  In the case of developing into another reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) with relatively high reliability in the middle or at the end of the reach effect (for example, normal reach effect) with relatively low reliability for the jackpot, for example, as follows An effect display may be performed. For example, after a decorative loss-like decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle or at the end of a reach production with relatively low reliability, restart at least one of the decorative symbols (resume scrolling). May be developed into other reach productions with relatively high reliability.

  Next, the ratio (hereinafter referred to as “reach ratio”) in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined as a variation pattern that can determine the variation effect pattern that can execute the reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reach ratio corresponding to the first special symbol determination in the case of being controlled to the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 determines a special symbol variation pattern that can determine a variation presentation pattern capable of executing a reach presentation (that is, the reach ratio is 100). %). On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, for example, based on the reach random number value acquired when the game ball wins the start opening and the number of holds at the time of executing the special symbol determination, It is determined whether or not to determine from those exceeding 13.5 seconds (in this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern of 19 seconds or more corresponds). In the main ROM 102 of the game control board 100, for example, a determination value for comparison with the value of the reach random number is stored in advance so that the reach ratio varies depending on the type of the winning start port and the game state. When it is decided to decide from a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds, a special design pattern that can determine a variation effect pattern in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is reach lose in a variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 40) described later. The variation pattern will be determined. On the other hand, when it is decided to decide from a fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less, the fluctuation of the special symbol that can decide the fluctuation effect pattern in which the fluctuation display mode of the decoration symbol is non-reach in the fluctuation pattern determination process The pattern will be determined.

  Here, an example of the reach ratio corresponding to the first special symbol at the time of the normal gaming state control will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). In the present embodiment, the reach ratio is set in advance so as to be relatively smaller as the number of the first special symbol determination held during the special symbol determination is relatively large (see FIG. 10B). For example, when “0 to 99” is set in advance as a determination value for comparison with the reach random number, as illustrated in FIG. 10A, the first special symbol determination is suspended at the time of executing the first special symbol determination. If not (hereinafter also referred to as “pending 0”), “0 to 84” is defined as a determination value for determining that the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined from the variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. . Then, “85 to 99” is determined as a determination value determined to be determined from a fluctuation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds (that is, the reach ratio is 15%). In addition, when one or two first special symbol determinations are held during the execution of the first special symbol determination (hereinafter, also referred to as “holding 1-2”), it is determined to be determined from a fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. “0 to 89” is defined as the determination value. Then, “90 to 99” is determined as a determination value determined to be determined from a fluctuation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds (that is, the reach ratio is 10%). Further, when three first special symbol determinations are held during execution of the first special symbol determination (hereinafter also referred to as “hold 3”), a determination value determined to be determined from a fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. “0 to 94” is defined as. Then, “95 to 99” is determined as a determination value determined to be determined from a fluctuation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds (that is, the reach ratio is 5%).

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 may perform control for transmitting a hold command to the effect control board 130 based on, for example, winning of a game ball at the start opening. The hold command includes information indicating values of various random numbers for special symbol determination, and preliminary determination information that is a result of the preliminary determination (step S2109 in FIG. 35 and step S2209 in FIG. 37). Based on the receipt of the hold command, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can recognize whether or not to win a jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol, the winning start information, the gaming state when the hold command is transmitted, and the like. .

  Here, the number of reserved special symbol determinations is not necessarily the same when the prior determination is performed and when the special symbol determination is actually executed and the special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can identify a variation pattern that is actually used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the received hold command in the case of a big hit (see FIG. 12A-1). However, at the time of losing, the reach ratio differs according to the number of special symbols held when the special symbol determination is executed (see FIG. 10A). For this reason, at the time of losing, the information on the variation pattern indicated by the preliminary determination information may not actually match the variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, by adopting the configuration illustrated in FIG. 10A, it may be possible to determine that at least the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined from the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds. It is set in advance.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, when the game state when the game ball is won at the first start port 11 is the normal game state, the game is lost, and the reach random number value is 0 to 84, A determination value for comparison with the value of the reach random number is assigned in advance so that the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less regardless of the number of pending first special symbol determination (FIG. 10A). ) And (B)). If the reach random number is 95 to 99, the reach random number is determined so that the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds regardless of the number of the first special symbol determination pending. A determination value for comparison with the value of is assigned in advance. That is, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can determine that a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less is determined when the reach random number is 0 to 84. When the reach random number value is 95 to 99, it can be determined that a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds is determined. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the reach random number is 0 to 84 or 95 to 99, the information indicated by the preliminary determination information and the variation pattern that is actually used for the variation display of the special symbol are 13 Inconsistency does not occur between information on whether or not it exceeds 5 seconds. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended enemy character pre-reading effect from being executed during a special symbol variation display that should not be executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended enemy character pre-reading effect from being executed with a special symbol determination suspension that should not be a pre-read target of an enemy character pre-reading effect being pre-read.

  In another embodiment, whether or not the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the loss even when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a big hit. In another embodiment, the variation pattern may be determined without determining whether or not the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds at the time of the loss as well as the big hit. Note that the reach ratio illustrated in FIG. 10 is merely an example, and any reach ratio may be used.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the reach ratio is different depending on the number of reserved special symbol determinations when the special symbol determination is executed. In other embodiments, the reach ratio may be the same regardless of the number of reserved special symbol determinations. In this case, there is no inconsistency between the information indicated by the prior determination information and the information on whether or not the variation pattern actually used for the variation display of the special symbol is a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds. For this reason, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can always determine that the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds is determined based on the hold command received from the game control board 100. When such a configuration is adopted, it is not possible to determine whether or not a fluctuation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds is determined, thereby eliminating the problem that the possibility that the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed is extremely reduced. There is a possibility.

  In another embodiment, for example, the reach ratio may be higher in the case of being controlled in the probability variation gaming state than in the case of being controlled in the normal gaming state. As an example, in the case of being controlled in the probability variation gaming state, the reach ratio may be 100% when the jackpot is large, and the reach ratio may be 0% when the game is lost (that is, the reach loss is 0%). With this setting, for example, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot is confirmed when the enemy character look-ahead effect that notifies that the SP reach effect is executed is started.

  Next, an example of the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the case of being controlled in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the case of being controlled to the normal gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 11, variation patterns A1 to A31 are prepared in advance as jackpot variation patterns, and variation patterns H01 to H04 and H1 to H31 are prepared in advance as loss variation patterns. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100, the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined by the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130. This variation effect pattern is the basis (scenario) of the presence and configuration of various effects such as reach effects.

  For example, the reach effect is executed and the effect of notifying the jackpot is executed based on the change effect patterns corresponding to the jackpot change patterns A1 to A31. On the other hand, based on the variation effect patterns corresponding to the loss variation patterns H01 to H03, the effect of notifying the loss is executed without executing the reach effect. Further, based on the variation effect patterns H04 and the variation effect patterns corresponding to H1 to H31, the effect of notifying the loss is executed after the reach effect is executed.

  In the following description, among the variation patterns for loss, a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less may be referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds may be referred to as a reach variation pattern.

  As illustrated in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the normal reach effects are classified into normal 1 and normal 2. Also, the SP reach effect is classified into SP1, SP2, and SP3, and the SPSP reach effect is classified into SPSP1, SPSP2, and SPSP3. In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher in the order of normal 1 <normal 2 <SP3 <SP2 <SP1 <SPSP3 <SPSP2 <SPSP1. In addition, the degree of expectation for developing a more reliable reach is higher in the order of normal 1 <normal 2 in the normal reach production, and higher in the order of SP3 <SP2 <SP1 in the SP reach production.

  In Normal 1, the left symbol and right symbol in the reach state are superimposed on the background image (for example, an effect image simulating mountain scenery) displayed before the reach is established, and the scroll speed of the middle symbol is gradually reduced. Production. Normal 1 is a normal reach effect in which a loss is always notified without developing into an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect.

  Normal 2 is an effect in which a background image different from that before the reach is established, for example, a normal reach effect in which an effect image with a motif of drugs, vehicles, and the like is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a big hit or loss is notified at the end of normal 2, or an SP reach effect (ie, SP1, SP2, or SP3) or an SPSP reach effect (ie, SPSP3) is developed during or at the end of normal 2. To do.

  SP1 is an effect in which a teammate character (for example, attack character A) that is not very strong is the main player. In SP1, for example, an effect image in which the teammate character defeats enemy characters one after another is displayed, or an effect display in which an enemy character count image indicating the number of enemy characters defeated by the teammate character is added. For example, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, a variation pattern H29 of 134 seconds) has a larger number of enemy character images than a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (for example, variation pattern H23 of 113 seconds). It is easy to select a variation effect pattern in which the final number increases.

  In the present embodiment, the SP1 is not notified of the win, and the SPSP reach effect (that is, SPSP1 or SPSP2) is always executed after the execution of SP1. For this reason, when SP1 is executed, it is possible to notify that the SPSP reach effect is executed thereafter. In the present embodiment, SP1 is regarded as one of SP reach effects different from SPSP reach effects. However, since SPSP reach effects are executed at a rate of 100% after execution of SP1, SP1 is one of SPSP reach effects. It is good also as a part (namely, production of the first half).

  SP2 is an effect mainly composed of enemy characters. In SP2, for example, an effect image is displayed in which the enemy character attempts to destroy the winning image that has the same decorative design as the reach design. In this case, at the time of losing, the losing is notified after the winning image is finally destroyed. At the time of a big hit, the hit image is not finally destroyed and is pseudo-stopped on the active line together with the reach symbol, and the big hit is notified. Also, at the time of the big hit, after the winning image is finally destroyed by the enemy character, the revival effect that makes it appear as if the big hit has been revived is executed immediately after the effect that pretends to be lost once is executed The jackpot may be notified by.

  In SP2, for example, an effect image may be displayed in which an enemy character attempts to destroy a development destination suggestion image that suggests an effect content of an SPSP reach effect that may develop from SP2. At the time of losing, losing is notified after the development suggestion image is finally destroyed by the enemy character. At the time of jackpot, the development destination suggestion image is not finally destroyed but is pseudo-stopped on the active line together with the reach pattern, and then developed into SPSP reach production (that is, SPSP1 or SPSP3).

  As described above, in this embodiment, a big hit or a loss is notified at the end of SP2, or an SPSP reach effect (ie, SPSP1 or SPSP3) or an SPSP reach effect (ie, SPSP3) is developed during or at the end of SP2.

  SPSP1 displays, for example, a CG effect image in which a stronger ally character (eg, attacking character E) than the ally character appearing in SP1 is transformed into a stronger state with increased strength and defeats countless enemy characters. This is a production. At the time of the big hit, an effect image in which the enemy character is annihilated and the ally character wins is displayed at the end of SPSP1 to notify the big hit. At the time of losing, an effect image in which the enemy character is defeated without being able to annihilate the enemy character at the end of SPSP1 is displayed to notify the losing.

  SPSP2 is an effect in which, for example, an effect image of a CG in which the same ally character as the ally character appearing in SPSP1 fights against the enemy character's boss in a normal state is displayed. At the time of the big hit, an effect image in which the ally character defeats the boss is displayed at the end of SPSP2 to notify the big hit. At the time of losing, an effect image in which the ally character is defeated by the boss at the end of SPSP2 is displayed to notify the losing.

  SPSP3 is an animation in which, for example, an ally character that is the same as an ally character appearing in SPSP1, or an ally character that is stronger than an ally character appearing in SP1 but weaker than an ally character appearing in SPSP1 (for example, attacking character B) fights an enemy character. The effect image is displayed. At the time of the big hit, an effect image in which the teammate character defeats the enemy character is displayed at the end of SPSP3 to notify the big hit. At the time of losing, an effect image in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character at the end of SPSP3 is displayed to notify the losing.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, the sub ROM 132 of the production control board 130 stores in advance the reach production of one or more types of production modes corresponding to normal 2, SP1, SP2, SP3, SPSP1, SPSP2, and SPSP3. Has been. As an example, a case will be described in which the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 determines the variation pattern A1 with a special symbol variation time of 45 seconds. In the sub ROM 132 of the effect control board 130, for example, five types of change effect patterns corresponding to the change pattern A1 are stored in advance. When the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern as the variation pattern A1, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 selects one of the five types of variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern A1 based on the jackpot symbol and the variation effect pattern random number. A variation production pattern is determined. Thereby, during the variation display of the special symbol, the normal 2 of the predetermined motif (for example, medicine) corresponding to the type of the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern A1 is executed as the normal reach effect.

  Here, in this embodiment, for example, when the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern A23 to A25, A29 to A31, H23 to H25, or H29 to H31, the variation effect pattern is 1 of the SP reach effect in the sub CPU 131. Thus, a variation effect pattern that is developed from SP1 to SPSP reach effect and is notified of a winning (big hit or lost) is determined.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern A10 to A12, A20 to A22, A26 to A28, H10 to H12, H20 to H22, or H26 to H28, the sub CPU 131 performs SP reach production 1 The variation effect pattern that will be notified of the winning after SP2 is executed is determined. For example, when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the jackpot variation patterns A10 to A12, after SP2 in which the enemy character eventually destroys the development destination suggestion image is executed, the revival effect is executed and the jackpot Is realized. When the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the loss variation patterns H10 to H12, a variation effect is realized in which the loss is notified after SP2 is executed in which the enemy character eventually destroys the development destination suggestion image. Will be. In addition, when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the big hit variation patterns A20 to A22, A26 to A28, H20 to H22, and H26 to H28, SP2 in which the enemy character cannot finally destroy the development destination suggestion image. After being executed, the effect is developed into an SPSP reach effect and a fluctuating effect in which the winning is notified is realized.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern A12) that can determine a variation effect pattern that can execute “pseudo continuous effect” and a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern A10) that can determine a variation effect pattern that cannot execute a pseudo continuous effect. Are prepared in advance. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that notifies (or suggests) that the greater the number of executions (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-continuous number”), the higher the reliability for the jackpot. The pseudo-continuous production is performed before the reach is established (even during the reach production), for example, after all of the decorative symbols after the decorative pattern of the losing mode (for example, the non-reach or the reach-losing mode) is pseudo-stopped on the active line. Is an effect of re-variation (pseudo-variation). It should be noted that all the decorative symbols may be re-variable (pseudo-variation) in response to the effect image (pseudo-continuous image) informing the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect being pseudo-stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of a special symbol is set in advance so that a variation effect pattern having a larger number of pseudo-continuations is more easily determined than a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time. Yes. In other embodiments, one variation pattern may be associated with a plurality of variation effect patterns that differ in the number of times that the pseudo continuous effect can be executed.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the determination ratio of the first special symbol variation pattern in the normal gaming state. For example, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 is notified of the determination result of the special symbol determination using the variation pattern random number acquired when the game ball is won at the start opening and the variation pattern table (not shown). Previously determine the variation pattern. The variation pattern table is, for example, a table to which a determination value for comparison with the value of the variation pattern random number is assigned in advance. For example, the main ROM 102 stores in advance a variation pattern table that is different for each start port type and gaming state. FIG. 12 illustrates the ratio of the number of determination values allocated to each variation pattern, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the variation pattern random number. In order to simplify the explanation, the variation effect patterns having the same reach effect configuration that can be executed with different pseudo-continuous times are grouped and explained for each change pattern that can be determined.

  First, a jackpot variation pattern table (not shown) referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 12A-1, in the case of a jackpot, more determination values are assigned to a variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is relatively long. For example, corresponding to jackpot symbol A, 1% for variation patterns A1-A3, 1% for variation patterns A4-A6, 3% for variation patterns A7-A9, 3% for variation patterns A10-A12, and variation pattern A13 A determination value of 4% is assigned in advance to 3% and the variation patterns A14 to A16. Further, 12% of the variation patterns A17 to 19, 13% of the variation patterns A20 to A22, 18% of the variation patterns A23 to A25, 19% of the variation patterns A26 to A28, and 23% of the variation patterns A29 to A31 are determined. Values are pre-allocated.

  At the time of a big hit, for example, a variation effect pattern with a larger number of pseudo-continuations is more easily determined in a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time than a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. As an example, the allocation of determination values corresponding to jackpot symbol A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the breakdown of the determination ratio of the jackpot variation pattern. For example, among the 3% determination values assigned to the variation patterns A10 to A12, 25% is assigned to the variation pattern A10, 30% is assigned to the variation pattern A11, and 45% is assigned to the variation pattern A12. Further, for example, out of 13% determination values assigned to the variation patterns A20 to A22, 20% is assigned to the variation pattern A20, 25% is assigned to the variation pattern A21, and 55% is assigned to the variation pattern A22 in advance. .

Specifically, when “0 to 9999” is set as the determination value, determination values in the following ranges are assigned to the variation patterns A1 to A31 corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, respectively.
Fluctuation pattern A1: “0 to 24”
Fluctuation pattern A2: “25 to 54”
Fluctuation pattern A3: “55 to 99”
Fluctuation pattern A4: “100 to 124”
Fluctuation pattern A5: “125 to 154”
Fluctuation pattern A6: “155 to 199”
Fluctuation pattern A7: “200 to 274”
Fluctuation pattern A8: “275-364”
Fluctuation pattern A9: “365-499”
Fluctuation pattern A10: “500 to 574”
Fluctuation pattern A11: “575-664”
Fluctuation pattern A12: “665-799”
Fluctuation pattern A13: “800 to 1099”
Fluctuation pattern A14: “1100 to 1179”
Fluctuation pattern A15: “1180 to 1279”
Fluctuation pattern A16: “1280 to 1499”
Fluctuation pattern A17: “1500-1739”
Fluctuation pattern A18: “1740-2039”
Fluctuation pattern A19: “2040-2699”
Fluctuation pattern A20: “2700-2959”
Fluctuation pattern A21: “2960-3284”
Fluctuation pattern A22: “3285-3999”
Fluctuation pattern A23: “4000-4359”
Fluctuation pattern A24: “4360-4809”
Fluctuation pattern A25: “4810-5799”
Fluctuation pattern A26: “5800-6179”
Fluctuation pattern A27: “6180-6654”
Fluctuation pattern A28: “6655 to 7699”
Fluctuation pattern A29: “7700-8159”
Fluctuation pattern A30: “8160-8734”
Fluctuation pattern A31: “8735-9999”

  As illustrated in FIG. 12 (A-1), the allocation of the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol C is relatively shorter than the allocation corresponding to the jackpot symbol A and B. It is set in advance so that it is difficult to determine that the variation time of the special symbol is relatively long. With such a setting, the jackpot advantageous for the player (that is, the jackpot symbol A or B) tends to have a relatively long variation time of the special symbol, and as a result, the reach effect that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high. Is easily determined to be a variation production pattern to be executed. With such a setting, for example, when SPSP1 (see FIG. 11), which is one of SPSP reach effects, is executed, the player can expand his expectation for an advantageous jackpot. Further, in the present embodiment, SP1, which is one of the SP reach effects, is an effect informing that the SPSP reach effect is confirmed to be executed, so at the time SP1 is executed, the player expects an advantageous jackpot It is possible to inflate the feeling.

  As illustrated in FIG. 12A-1, the allocation of the determination value corresponding to jackpot symbol B is determined to have a relatively long variation time of the special symbol compared to the case corresponding to jackpot symbol C. It is set in advance so that it can be easily performed. In addition, the allocation of the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is likely to be determined with a relatively short fluctuation time of the special symbol compared to the case corresponding to the jackpot symbol A. As a result, the reliability for the jackpot symbol is relatively However, it is easy to determine a variation effect pattern in which a reach effect that is not low but not high is executed. With such a setting, even if a reach effect is executed in which the reliability for the jackpot is not relatively high, there is a possibility that the jackpot is advantageous to the player (that is, the jackpot symbol B). For example, even if SP3 (see FIG. 11), which is one of the SP reach effects, is executed, the player can enjoy the game without losing the expectation that it may be an advantageous jackpot.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12 (B-1), the reach that is referred to when the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined from the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 12 (B-1), at the time of loss, for example, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the special symbol is longer than a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time of the special symbol. A small number of judgment values for comparison with the value of the fluctuation pattern random number are allocated. As an example, the variation pattern H04 is 11%, the variation patterns H1 to H3 are 24%, the variation patterns H4 to H6 are 15%, and the variation is corresponding to the case where the number of the special symbol determination is 0 when the special symbol determination is executed. A judgment value of 13% is assigned in advance to the patterns H7 to H9, and a judgment value of 9% is assigned to the variation patterns H10 to H12. Further, 9% for the fluctuation pattern H13, 5% for the fluctuation patterns H14 to H16, 4% for the fluctuation patterns H17 to 19, 4% for the fluctuation patterns H20 to H22, 3% for the fluctuation patterns H23 to H25, and fluctuation patterns H26 to H28. A determination value of 1% is assigned in advance to the variation patterns H29 to H31.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol is set in advance so that it is easier to determine a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time for the special symbol than for the loss. In the present embodiment, a variation effect pattern having a larger number of pseudo-continuations is determined for a variation pattern that is a loss and has a relatively long variation time than a variation pattern that has a relatively short variation time. It is easy to be done. Then, a variation effect pattern with a smaller number of pseudo-continuations is easier to determine for a variation pattern that is a loss and has a relatively short variation time than a variation pattern that has a relatively long variation time. As an example, the breakdown of the determination ratio of the reach variation pattern will be described with reference to FIG. For example, among the determination values assigned to the variation patterns H10 to H13, 30% is assigned to the variation pattern H10, 50% is assigned to the variation pattern H11, and 20% is assigned to the variation pattern H12 in advance. For example, among the determination values allocated to the variation patterns H20 to H22, determination values of 25% are allocated to the variation pattern H20, 30% are allocated to the variation pattern H21, and 45% are allocated to the variation pattern H22 in advance.

Specifically, for example, when “0 to 9999” is set as the determination value, each variation pattern corresponds to a case where the number of special symbol determination suspensions at the time of execution of the special symbol determination is 0. The following ranges of judgment values are assigned. For the variation patterns H10, H20, H23, H26, and H29, the range of the assigned determination value is the same regardless of whether the number of special symbol determination is 0 to 3 when executing the special symbol determination. It is set in advance (see FIG. 12C).
Fluctuation pattern H04: “0-1099”
Fluctuation pattern H1: "1100-1819"
Fluctuation pattern H2: “1820-3019”
Fluctuation pattern H3: “3020-3499”
Fluctuation pattern H4: “3500-3949”
Fluctuation pattern H5: “3950-4699”
Fluctuation pattern H6: “4700-4999”
Fluctuation pattern H7: “5000-5389”
Fluctuation pattern H8: “5390-6039”
Fluctuation pattern H9: “6040-6299”
Fluctuation pattern H10: “6930-7199” (same range regardless of the number of special symbol determination suspensions)
Fluctuation pattern H11: “6300 to 6749”
Fluctuation pattern H12: “6750-6929”
Fluctuation pattern H13: “7200-8099”
Fluctuation pattern H14: “8100-8224”
Fluctuation pattern H15: “8225-8374”
Fluctuation pattern H16: “8375-8599”
Fluctuation pattern H17: “8600-8699”
Fluctuation pattern H18: “8700-8819”
Fluctuation pattern H19: “8820-8999”
Fluctuation pattern H20: “9750-9850” (same range regardless of the number of special symbol judgment suspensions)
Fluctuation pattern H21: “9000 to 9119”
Fluctuation pattern H22: “9120-9299”
Fluctuation pattern H23: “9851 to 9924” (same range regardless of the number of special symbol determination pending)
Fluctuation pattern H24: “9300-9389”
Fluctuation pattern H25: “9390-9524”
Fluctuation pattern H26: “9925-9974” (same range regardless of the number of special symbol judgment suspensions)
Fluctuation pattern H27: “9525 to 9584”
Fluctuation pattern H28: “9585-9674”
Fluctuation pattern H29: “9995 to 9999” (the same range regardless of the number of special symbol judgment suspensions)
Fluctuation pattern H30: “9675-9704”
Fluctuation pattern H31: “9705 to 9749”

  As illustrated in FIG. 12 (B-1), in the case of a loss, the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol determination at the time of executing the special symbol determination is relatively smaller (for example, the above-mentioned number of holds 0). In the case where there are many (for example, the number of holdings is 3), determination values are pre-assigned so that it is easy to determine that the variation time of the special symbol is relatively short and it is difficult to determine that the variation time of the special symbol is relatively long. It is. Although detailed explanation is omitted, these are lost, and the variation pattern table for non-reach (non-reach) referred to when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined from the variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. The same applies to (shown).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 executes the “enemy character prefetching effect” based on the reception of the hold command including the information indicating the specific variation pattern from the game control board 100. May be determined. The enemy character look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests (or notifies) the possibility that a specific reach effect (for example, SP1 and SP2) is executed without executing the pseudo continuous effect. The enemy character pre-reading effect is performed from the time when the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol determination executed before the special symbol determination related to the pre-read target is displayed to the predetermined timing during the change display of the special symbol related to the pre-read target (for example, SP). It is an effect that operates the effect actor 71 over the time when the reach effect starts. A specific configuration of the enemy character pre-reading effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation pattern A10, A20, A23, A26, or A29 is determined as the variation pattern based on the information indicating the variation pattern included in the prior determination information at the time of the big hit. Can be judged. Further, at the time of loss, it is configured so that it can be determined that at least the variation pattern H10, H20, H23, H26, or H29 is determined as the variation pattern.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, as described above, the determination values in the same range for the variation patterns H10, H20, H23, H26, and H29, regardless of the number of holds during the execution of the first special symbol determination. Are allocated in advance (see FIG. 12C). For this reason, when the information included in the preliminary determination information indicates the variation pattern H10, H20, H23, H26, or H29, the information indicating the variation pattern included in the preliminary determination information and the actual special symbol variation display There is no inconsistency with the variation pattern used in Thereby, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can determine whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed based on the information regarding the variation pattern included in the prior determination information. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended enemy character pre-reading effect from being executed for a special symbol determination suspension that should not be a target of pre-reading of an enemy character pre-reading effect.

  The determination ratio of the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 12 is merely an example, and any determination ratio may be used. For example, the jackpot symbol A may be more easily determined as a variation pattern having a shorter variation time of the special symbol than the jackpot symbols B and C.

  In another embodiment, for example, at the time of a big hit, an SP reach effect is applied to a fluctuation pattern to which a value in the same range is assigned as a determination value for comparison with a fluctuation pattern random number value regardless of the type of the big hit symbol. And the fluctuation production pattern which can perform SPSP reach production may be matched. Further, for example, at the time of losing, the SP reach effect and the SPSP are applied to the variation pattern to which the same range of values as the determination value for comparison with the value of the variation pattern random number is assigned regardless of the number of the first special symbol determination pending. A variation effect pattern capable of executing a reach effect may be associated.

  In addition, the variation pattern described with reference to FIG. 11 is merely an example, and in other embodiments, any variation pattern may be provided. For example, a jackpot variation pattern that can be determined only at the time of a jackpot is provided, and corresponding to this variation pattern, all the decorative symbols are synchronized in a jackpot manner and scrolled from top to bottom in a manner that the player can visually recognize. A variation effect pattern may be associated. In addition, the number of pseudo-continuous effects that can be executed during one special symbol variation display is not limited to 0 to 2, but may be any number. For example, three pseudo-continuous effects may be executed only at the time of a big hit. In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment having the effect of informing the jackpot confirmation, for example, the enemy character pre-reading effect suggests (or notifies) that the effect of informing the jackpot confirmation is executed as a variation effect. May be.

  In another embodiment, immediately before the fact that the determination result of the special symbol determination is informed that it is a big hit, the rebirth effect that makes it seem as if the big hit has been revived immediately after the production that once seemed to be lost is performed. The variation effect pattern that realizes the variation effect in which the jackpot is notified and may be associated with any variation pattern. Further, when the revival effect is performed, it may be set in advance so that the final stop symbol of the big hit mode is easily (or hardly) aligned with the seven symbols, compared with the case where the revival effect is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination rate for each variation pattern is set differently in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state and the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state. Thereby, the ratio determined by the same fluctuation | variation pattern can be varied according to which game state it is. For example, when the game state is controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a probable game state), the variation time of the special symbol is relatively shorter than when the game state is controlled to another game state (for example, the normal game state). The pattern may be easily selected. Further, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be an effect executed only during a predetermined gaming state (for example, a probable variation gaming state).

  In another embodiment, a different variation pattern may be determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation gaming state, a short-time gaming state, or a normal gaming state. Good. As a result, different variation patterns can be determined depending on which gaming state the player is in. For example, in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the short time gaming state, a variation pattern having a variation time shorter than that in the normal gaming state may be prepared in advance. Thereby, the variation time of the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state and the short time gaming state can be shortened.

[Example configuration of enemy character look-ahead production]
Next, an enemy character prefetching effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration example of an enemy character pre-reading effect and its feasibility. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the enemy character prefetch effect is executed in the order of a screen reduction effect, a prefetch operation effect, a transition button effect, and a transition effect.

  The screen reduction effect is an effect for allowing the player to recognize that the enemy character look-ahead effect has been started, and is an effect that is executed before the fluctuating display of the special symbol related to the look-ahead target of the enemy character look-ahead effect is started. (See FIG. 13A). The pre-reading action effect is an effect that can make it easier for the player to recognize that the enemy character pre-reading effect is being executed by operating the effect agent 71. In addition, the pre-reading action effect is an effect that starts before the display of fluctuation of the special symbol related to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect is started and ends during the change display of the special symbol related to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect. is there.

  The transition button effect is an effect that suggests that the effect of a specific effect mode (SP1 or SP2 in the present embodiment) is started, and is executed during the special symbol variation display related to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. This is a production. The transition button effect is one of button effects that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26. During the transition button effect, a predetermined valid period (for example, 4 seconds from the start of the transition button effect) in which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid is set. When the player operates the effect button 26 within this effective period, the transition button effect ends according to the operation, and the transition effect starts. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the effective period, the transition button effect ends and the transition effect occurs at a predetermined end time of the effective period (for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the transition button effect). Is started. For this reason, in this embodiment, the maximum execution time of the transition button effect is 4 seconds.

  The transition effect is an effect that suggests that the effect of a specific effect mode (SP1 or SP2 in this embodiment) is started and the effect mode, and changes in special symbols related to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-read effect. It is an effect executed during display. In this embodiment, the structure which absorbs the time difference which arises by the presence or absence of operation of the production | presentation button 26 during a transition button production | presentation, and operation timing is employ | adopted by the execution time of a transition production | presentation. For this reason, the transition effect is executed in the shortest execution time (hereinafter also referred to as “minimum execution time”) when the transition effect is started without operating the effect button 26 during the transition button effect. For example, the minimum execution time of the transition effect is set in advance to be 5 seconds.

(Screen configuration example of the liquid crystal screen 5 when controlled to the normal gaming state)
As illustrated in FIG. 13 (B-1), in the present embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the normal gaming state, the fluctuating effect is being performed, and the enemy character look-ahead effect is being executed. If there is not, the “design area 50”, the “area 53”, and the “hold area 54” may be formed on the liquid crystal screen 5. On the other hand, during the enemy character pre-reading effect, as illustrated in FIG. 13B-2, the symbol area 50 is reduced to emphasize the effect image related to the enemy character pre-reading effect such as the screen reduced image 55. In addition, the area 53 and the reserved area 54 are erased without being formed. The screen reduced image 55 is an effect image imitating a state in which relatively large decorative symbols are variably displayed using most of the area of the liquid crystal screen 5 as exemplified in FIG. 13B-1. is there. The reduced screen image 55 is an effect image that is displayed when the enemy character pre-reading effect is started (in the present embodiment, during the screen reduction effect).

  The symbol area 50 is an area in which the decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination is variably displayed and stopped. In the present embodiment, the symbol area 50 is not a fixed area, and moves or changes in size within the display screen of the liquid crystal screen 5 as the game progresses. For example, if the reach effect and the enemy character look-ahead effect are not executed, the symbol area 50 is formed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 as illustrated in FIG. As a result, a relatively large decorative pattern is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. On the other hand, when the variation effect is being performed and the reach effect or the enemy character look-ahead effect is being executed, in order to emphasize these effects, the design area 50 is reduced in size on the liquid crystal screen 5. Move to the upper center (see FIG. 13B-2). As a result, a relatively small decorative design is reduced and displayed at the upper center of the liquid crystal screen 5.

  In the following description, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol region 50 (see FIG. 13B-1) formed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is referred to as “decorative symbol”, and the upper center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size in the symbol region 50 (see FIG. 13B-2) formed in FIG. The small symbol has lower visibility than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol region 50 formed large in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. However, the player can easily recognize the determination result of the special symbol determination by the small symbol. Note that during the variable display, the small symbols may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize (or in a state where they cannot be visually recognized). For example, the small symbols may be displayed only when the variable display is started and stopped.

  The hold area 54 is an area for displaying a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold. In the holding area 54, the same number of holding icons as the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol holding indicator 43 are displayed. For example, when the variation effect is being performed and the reach effect and the enemy character look-ahead effect are not executed, the holding area 54 is formed at the lower center of the liquid crystal screen 5 as illustrated in FIG. The hold icon is displayed. In FIG. 13 (B-1), four hold icons 541, 542, 543, and 544 are displayed in the hold area 54 in order to indicate that the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is the maximum “4”. The state displayed in the order in which the special symbol determination is suspended is illustrated. Specifically, in a state where the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is 3, hold icons 541 to 543 are displayed. When the first special symbol determination is newly held in the state where the number of the first special symbol determination is 3, the hold icon 544 is displayed.

  The area 53 is an area in which the hold icon 541 is displayed as the icon in accordance with the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon 541 related to the earliest hold (the hold icon displayed first). . For example, along with the start of variable display of decorative symbols, an effect of shifting the hold icon 541 from the hold area 54 to the area 53 formed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal screen 5 is executed. When a hold icon other than the hold icon 541 is displayed in the hold area 54, an effect of shifting and displaying the hold icons in the hold area 54 in the area side is also executed. When the loss is notified in the state illustrated in FIG. 13B-1 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the icon corresponding to the hold icon 541 is displayed in the area 53 and the hold area 54 is displayed. Three hold icons 542, 543, and 544 are displayed. As a result, the player is informed that the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is three.

  In the present embodiment, when a variation effect is being performed and a reach effect or an enemy character look-ahead effect is being executed, the reserved area 54 and the area 53 are formed in order to emphasize the effect image relating to these effects. First, the hold icon and the icon are deleted from the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 13B-2).

  In addition to the reach effect and the enemy character look-ahead effect, the symbol area 50 may be reduced or the reserved area 54 and the area 53 may be deleted when any effect included in the variation effect is executed. For example, with the start of a cut-in effect, which is a notice effect for displaying a cut-in image showing an ally character on the liquid crystal screen 5 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the symbol area 50 is reduced, the reserved area 54 and the area 53 may be deleted.

  Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol determination may be suspended. In this case, the hold icon that suggests that the second special symbol determination is put on hold may or may not be displayed in the hold area 54.

[Possibility of prefetching enemy characters]
Here, a case where three pieces of preliminary determination information corresponding to the variation pattern for losing the first special symbol are stored in the sub-RAM 133 in succession will be described. For example, when receiving a hold command from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 stores various information such as pre-determination information included in the hold command in the hold storage area (see FIG. 46) provided in the sub RAM 133. Stored later). When the sub CPU 131 further receives a hold command when the three pieces of preliminary determination information are stored in the sub RAM 133, the sub CPU 131 performs control for displaying the hold icon 544 illustrated in FIG. Then, the three pieces of pre-determined information stored earlier indicate a loss, and the newly received pending command is a big hit variation pattern A10, A20, A23, A26, or A29, or a loss variation pattern H10, H20. , H23, H26, or H29, control is performed regarding whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect is controlled to be executable on the condition that the variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol determination hold held one or more before the pre-read target is 13.5 seconds or less. . With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the production is impaired due to the big hit game or the reach production being interrupted in the middle of the enemy character look-ahead production.

  First, the case where the variation pattern corresponding to the hold icons 541 to 543 (see FIG. 13B-1) is a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less will be described (see FIG. 13C). In such a case, the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character pre-reading effect for the pre-reading target corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon 544 (see FIG. 13B-1) can be executed. In this case, during the special symbol variation display related to the hold icon 541 corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol determination three times ahead of the prefetch target (hereinafter referred to as “3 pre-change”), the prefetch target of 2 During the change display of the special symbol related to the hold icon 542 corresponding to the hold of the previous first special symbol determination (hereinafter referred to as “2 before change”), the first special symbol immediately before the prefetch target The enemy character pre-reading effect can be started at any timing during the change display of the special symbol related to the hold icon 543 corresponding to the hold of the determination (hereinafter referred to as “1 change before”). The enemy character look-ahead effect scenario where the enemy character look-ahead effect starts before the change is the random number for the enemy character look-ahead effect when the effect control board 130 receives the hold command from the game control board 100 (for effect control) It is determined by lottery using one of random numbers.

  Next, a case where at least one variation pattern among the variation patterns related to 1 to 3 variations exceeds 13.5 seconds will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 13C, when the variation display mode of the decorative symbol before the third variation is reach loss, and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol before the second variation and the one variation before is non-reach, The sub CPU 131 can determine an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario in which an enemy character pre-reading effect is executed before two changes or one change. Also, the decorative display variation display mode before the third variation is reach lose or non-reach, the decorative display variation display mode before the second variation is reach loss, and the decorative design variation display mode before the first variation is non-reach. In the case of reach, the sub CPU 131 can determine an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed before one change. Note that when the variation display of the decorative symbol before one variation is reach lose, the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character pre-reading effect cannot be executed.

  Here, an example of the start timing of the enemy character prefetching effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a determination ratio of timing at which the enemy character prefetching effect is started. In the present embodiment, when an enemy character prefetching effect scenario in which the enemy character prefetching effect is executed from any one of 1 to 3 before the change is determined, the first special symbol determination that is the target of the enemy character prefetching effect is started. It is determined at which timing during the special symbol variation display the enemy character pre-reading effect is to be started.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a start timing determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and based on the type of variation effect pattern corresponding to the start variation pattern, the enemy character prefetch effect start timing. The start timing of the enemy character pre-reading effect is determined by lottery using a random number (one of random numbers for effect control). The start timing determination table is, for example, a determination value for comparing the type of the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the start target variation, the start timing of the enemy character prefetch effect, and the value of the enemy character prefetch effect start timing random number. Is a table in which As an example, in the start timing determination table, determination values for comparison with the values of the enemy character pre-reading effect start timing random numbers are allocated at the rate illustrated in FIG. FIG. 14 exemplifies the determination ratio, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the enemy character look-ahead effect start timing random number.

  In the present embodiment, depending on the timing at which the enemy character prefetching effect is started, a configuration that does not suggest the reliability for the jackpot related to the prefetching target of the enemy character prefetching effect is adopted. For example, when the variation effect pattern to be started corresponds to the variation pattern H01 (variation time 3 seconds), 0.5 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol started the variation display based on the variation effect pattern. It is predetermined that the enemy character pre-reading effect is started at the timing (see FIG. 14). In addition, when the variation effect pattern to be started corresponds to the variation pattern H02 or H03 (variation time 8 seconds or 13.5 seconds), the decorative design starts to display variation based on the variation effect pattern. The enemy character pre-reading effect is started at any timing of 0.5 seconds, 4 seconds, or 6 seconds. The determination ratios of these three start timings are determined in advance so as to be the same (see FIG. 14). Specifically, for example, when “0 to 101” is set as the determination value, in the start timing determination table, all determination values corresponding to the variation effect pattern associated with the variation pattern H01 are “0. “5 seconds later”. Further, the determination value in the range of “0 to 33” is “0.5 seconds later” and the determination value in the range of “34 to 67” is associated with the variation effect pattern associated with the variation pattern H02 or H03. Is assigned in advance to “after 4 seconds” and a determination value in the range of “68 to 101” is assigned to “after 6 seconds”.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player cannot predict the timing at which the enemy character look-ahead effect is started. For this reason, it is possible to start the enemy character pre-reading effect at the timing of hitting the player's intention, and it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the enemy character pre-reading effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the special symbol determination that has been previously suspended is a big hit, the enemy character pre-reading effect is not executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the enemy character prefetching effect can be said to be an effect capable of notifying that the determination result of the special symbol determination that is notified during the execution of the enemy character prefetching effect is lost. Then, the enemy character prefetching effect is held before the execution, and it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the determination result of the special symbol determination that is not yet notified when the enemy character prefetching effect is ended is a big hit. Production.

  The enemy character pre-reading effect is not limited to the timing described above, and may be started at any timing. In another embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be started from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start target (that is, at the start of the variation display of the special symbol).

  In another embodiment, the reliability of the prefetch target jackpot may be suggested depending on when the enemy character prefetch effect is started. As an example, it may be suggested that the reliability is higher as the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start target (that is, at the start of variation display of the special symbol) is shorter.

[Example of production flow when enemy character prefetching production is executed]
Next, specific examples of enemy character prefetching effects will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 15 is a time chart illustrating the flow of effects when the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed before three changes or before one change. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of a specific effect mode of an enemy character pre-read effect that is executed before three changes. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of a specific effect of the enemy character prefetching effect executed before one change.

  Referring to FIG. 15, the first special symbol determination hold corresponding to the hold icon 544 (see FIG. 13B-1) is set as a pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect, and the pre-reading target is 1 to 3 before the change. A case will be described in which the decorative symbol variation display mode is all non-reach and reports a loss. Note that reference numerals 541 to 544 in FIG. 15 correspond to the hold icons 541 to 544 described with reference to FIG. In addition, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon 544 is suspended, if the special symbol being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the loss is notified.

(Example of the flow of production when the enemy character look-ahead production starts before 3 changes)
First, with reference to FIG. 15A, a description will be given of a case where an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is started before three changes is determined.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the normal gaming state and the number of the first special symbol determination is “3”, the game ball is placed in the first start port 11 during the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol determination. When a prize is won, a preliminary determination is made based on the winning and the first special symbol determination is put on hold. This hold corresponds to the hold icon 544 described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 15A, all the prior determination information related to the hold corresponding to the hold icons 541 to 543 held before the hold corresponding to the hold icon 544 are all the variation pattern for loss of 13.5 seconds or less. It shall include information indicating. For this reason, all the variation display modes of the decorative symbols related to the 1 to 3 variations are non-reach. In such a situation, a case will be described in which a random number lottery determines a scenario for executing the enemy character pre-reading effect from before three changes based on the prior determination information related to the hold corresponding to the hold icon 544.

  A predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, see FIG. 14) has elapsed after the first special symbol variation display (that is, the decorative symbol variation display) corresponding to the hold icon 541 (see FIG. 13B-1) is started. When the time has elapsed, the enemy character look-ahead effect is started (T1 in FIG. 15A).

  In the enemy character pre-reading effect, first, a screen reduction effect is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). Subsequently, a pre-reading operation effect for operating the effect agent 71 is started (T2 in FIG. 15A). In the present embodiment, during the prefetching operation effect, the first special symbol variation display (that is, the decorative symbol variation display) related to the prefetching target is started (T5 in FIG. 15A). The pre-reading action effect is executed until the start timing of the transition button effect determined based on the start timing of the SP reach effect predetermined by the variation effect pattern corresponding to the pre-reading target (T6 in FIG. 15A). Here, in this embodiment, the start timing of various reach effects (for example, SP reach effect) is predetermined by the variation effect pattern. The start timing of the transition button effect is determined based on the start timing of the SP reach effect (that is, SP1 and SP2) defined by the variation effect pattern related to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. Specifically, the total time of the maximum execution time of the transition button effect (4 seconds in this embodiment) and the minimum execution time of the transition effect (5 seconds in this embodiment) is subtracted from the start timing of SP1 or SP2. The timing is set as the start timing of the transition button effect.

  As a specific example, a case will be described in which it is determined that SP1 is started when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation display of a decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) in the variation effect pattern corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. . In this embodiment, the maximum execution time of the transition button effect is 4 seconds and the minimum execution time of the transition effect is 5 seconds. For this reason, the time at which 21 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the prefetch target is set as the start timing of the transition button effect.

  In the present embodiment, in all the variation effect patterns that can be prefetched for the enemy character prefetching effect, the transition button effect is more effective than the period from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the prefetching object to the start of SP1 or SP2. The total time of the maximum execution time and the minimum execution time of the transition effect is smaller. For this reason, the pre-reading operation effect is ended and the transition button effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect. For example, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is started during the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading target 3 variation, the decorative symbol is 3 in a combination of non-reach during the enemy character pre-reading effect (here, during the pre-reading operation effect). The display is stopped once (see FIG. 15A).

  When the pre-reading operation effect is finished, the transition button effect is started (T6 in FIG. 15A). The transition button effect ends and the transition effect starts in response to the player operating the effect button 26 during the transition button effect or the expiration of the valid period predetermined for the transition button effect. Therefore, as a result, the transition effect is started at a timing based on the start timing of the SP reach effect (that is, SP1 and SP2) defined by the variation effect pattern related to the prefetch target. Since the transition effect is executed until the start timing of the SP reach effect, an effect display that directly develops to SP1 or SP2 that is the SP reach effect in response to the end of the transition effect, that is, the end of the enemy character prefetch effect. Will be done. As a result, the SP reach effect is started according to the arrival timing of the enemy character prefetch effect, so that it is easy to understand the prefetch target and it is possible to execute an effect with a high effect.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed using a variation effect pattern that develops into an SP reach effect after the normal reach effect is executed after the reach is established. For example, if the reach symbol is notified during the enemy character look-ahead effect at a predetermined reach establishment timing based on the variation effect pattern, the continuity of the enemy character look-ahead effect may be impaired and the effect may be reduced. is there. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the direct development to the SP reach production through the enemy character look-ahead production without passing the reach establishment and the normal reach production, the reach design is notified at the start of the SP reach production (for example, the reach design of the pseudo-stopped reach design). A configuration that is not displayed) is adopted. That is, immediately after the enemy character look-ahead effect, the SP reach effect is started in a state where all the decorative symbols are variably displayed (see FIG. 15A).

  In another embodiment, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is directly developed into the SP reach effect, the reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped during the enemy character pre-reading effect may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest that the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading object is being displayed before the transition button effect and the transition effect are started. In another embodiment, a reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped at the start of SP reach production may be displayed.

  In another embodiment, a variation effect pattern dedicated to the enemy character look-ahead effect (not necessarily dedicated) may be prepared in advance as a change effect pattern that can execute the enemy character look-ahead effect. Corresponding to the variation effect pattern dedicated to the enemy character look-ahead effect, for example, the SP reach effect (that is, SP1 and SP2) may be executed without the reach establishment or the normal reach effect (FIG. 9A to (E) Pattern) In the variation effect corresponding to such a variation effect pattern dedicated to the enemy character look-ahead effect, for example, an effect display that emphasizes the reach pattern when the direct development to the SP reach effect via the enemy character look-ahead effect is performed in advance. It is possible to set. The effect display that emphasizes the reach design may be, for example, an effect display in which the reach design is displayed relatively large and then moved to a predetermined area (for example, the upper right portion) of the liquid crystal screen 5 while being reduced.

(Example of the flow of production when the enemy character look-ahead production starts from one change)
FIG. 15B illustrates the flow of effects when a scenario is determined in which an enemy character pre-reading effect is started from one change before the pre-reading target. Specifically, FIG. 15B shows the same state as before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon 541 (see FIG. 13B-1) in FIG. 15A is started. In this example, the game ball is won at the first starting port 11 and another scenario in which the enemy character look-ahead effect is executed is determined. In the example illustrated in FIG. 15B, it is assumed that the advance determination information related to the hold corresponding to the hold icons 541 and 542 includes information indicating a variation pattern for loss. Further, it is assumed that the advance determination information related to the hold corresponding to the hold icon 543 includes information indicating a variation pattern for loss of 13.5 seconds or less. Therefore, the decorative display variation display mode before the third variation and before the second variation is reach lose or non-reach, and the decorative display variation display mode before the first variation is non-reach. In such a situation, a case will be described in which a scenario for executing an enemy character pre-reading effect from one change before is determined by random lottery based on prior determination information related to the hold corresponding to the hold icon 544.

  Even when the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon 541 (see FIG. 13B-1) (that is, the variation display of the decorative symbol) is started, the enemy character pre-reading effect is not executed during the variation display. Then, the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon 542 started after the change effect corresponding to the hold icon 541 ends without the enemy character pre-reading effect being executed. At the end of the variation effect corresponding to these hold icons, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of non-reach. Immediately after that, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, see FIG. 14) elapses after the decorative symbol change display corresponding to the hold icon 543 (see FIG. 13B-1) is started, the enemy character pre-reading effect is displayed. The process is started (see FIG. 15B).

  In the enemy character pre-reading effect, as in FIG. 15A, first, after the screen reduction effect is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second), the pre-reading action effect is started (see FIG. 15B). ). As in FIG. 15A, the pre-reading operation effect is executed until the start timing of the transition button effect determined based on the start timing of the SP reach effect determined in advance by the variation effect pattern corresponding to the pre-reading target ( T10 in FIG. If the enemy character pre-reading effect is started while the variation of the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading target 1 change is started, the decorative symbol is stopped once in a combination of non-reach during the enemy character pre-reading effect (here, the pre-reading operation effect). Will be displayed (see FIG. 15B).

  When the pre-reading operation effect is finished, the transition button effect is started (T10 in FIG. 15B). Then, in response to the player operating the effect button 26 during the transition button effect, or the expiration of a valid period predetermined for the transition button effect (for example, 4 seconds from the start of the transition button effect), When the transition button effect ends, the transition effect starts (T11 in FIG. 15B). When the transition effect is completed, it directly develops to SP1 or SP2 which is the SP reach effect.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in this embodiment, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is completed, an SP reach effect (SP1 or SP2) is started as a variable effect corresponding to the pre-read target. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize which special symbol determination is being performed for which the enemy character pre-reading effect is being executed.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the screen reduction effect is performed only within the start target of the enemy character prefetching effect. Further, the transition button effect and the transition effect are performed only during the change display of the special symbol related to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. On the other hand, the pre-reading action effect is between 2 and 4 fluctuations including the pre-reading object, depending on whether the scenario of the enemy character pre-reading effect of executing the enemy character pre-reading effect is determined from any of 1 to 3 fluctuations before. The period during which execution continues is changed.

[Specific example of enemy character look-ahead production performed before 3 changes]
Next, a specific example of the enemy character pre-reading effect executed before the third change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 shows a specific example corresponding to the production flow illustrated in FIG.

  FIG. 16 shows an example of a specific effect mode of the change effect based on the change effect pattern associated with the big hit change pattern A23 or A29 or the reach change pattern H23 or H29. In this specific example, as in FIG. 15A, a case will be described in which an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario in which an enemy character pre-reading effect is started before three changes to be pre-read is determined in advance. In addition, it is assumed that in the enemy character pre-reading effect, it is determined in advance that the transition button effect is executed in the mode B (see FIG. 16H) and the transition effect A is executed as the transition effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 16A, when the decorative symbol that notifies the loss is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol region 50, the icon displayed in the region 53 is deleted. Then, in response to the start of the change display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 16B, the hold icon related to the earliest hold displayed in the hold area 54 is the area 53. And is displayed as the icon, and the number of first special symbol determination is changed from 4 to 3. At the same time, the decorative symbol variation display is started in the symbol region 50.

  When the decorative symbol variation display is started, the enemy character pre-reading effect is started at a predetermined timing (for example, 0.5 seconds, see FIG. 14) after the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the present embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect is an effect in which an effect image related to the enemy character pre-reading effect (for example, the enemy character image 56) is displayed and emphasized over almost the entire visible area of the liquid crystal screen 5. Further, the enemy character pre-reading effect is an effect of reducing the visibility of the liquid crystal screen 5 by operating the effecting agent 71 to the advance position. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the enemy character look-ahead effect is started, a small symbol which is a decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size is displayed. Specifically, when the enemy character look-ahead effect is started, the symbol area 50 that has been large at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 is shifted to the upper center of the liquid crystal screen 5 in a reduced state. At the same time, the small symbols start to be displayed in a varying manner in the symbol region 50 formed at the upper center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 16C).

  With the change in the size and position of the symbol area 50, the following effects are performed in the enemy character look-ahead effect. When the enemy character pre-reading effect is started, a screen reduction effect is first executed (T1 in FIG. 15A). In the screen reduction effect, an effect display is performed in which a screen reduced image 55 simulating the state in which the decorative pattern being variably displayed is displayed while being reduced in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 16C). . Thereby, the player can recognize that the enemy character pre-reading effect has started. In this embodiment, the screen reduced image 55 is emphasized outside the area where the screen reduced image 55 is displayed, and an effect image for notifying that the display screen of the liquid crystal screen 5 is reduced is, for example, an analog television. A noise image (not shown) simulating snow noise generated at the time of radio wave disturbance is displayed. This noise image is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as the background of another effect image (for example, the enemy character image 56) until the transition effect is started even after the screen reduction effect ends.

  In addition, as long as it is an aspect which emphasizes the screen reduction image 55 except the area | region where the screen reduction image 55 is displayed, what kind of aspect may be sufficient. For example, blackout (or whiteout) may be performed, and the background image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 immediately before the start of the enemy character prefetching effect is continuously displayed in a blurred state (or in a state where the contrast is lowered). May be.

  During the screen reduction effect, for example, the effect character 71 may be intermittently operated between the advance position and the initial position. As an example, during the screen reduction effect, a reciprocating operation in which the effect character 71 is advanced to an intermediate position between the advance position and the initial position and then returned to the initial position may be repeated. Each time this reciprocating operation is repeated, for example, an effect display may be performed in which the screen reduced image 55 is reduced to the center of the liquid crystal screen 5 while shaking in the vertical direction or the like in a manner linked to the operation. At that time, a predetermined effect sound (for example, an enemy character's speech) may be output from the speaker 24 in a manner linked to the reciprocating motion of the effect agent 71.

  After the end of the screen reduction effect, as shown in FIG. 16D, the prefetching operation effect is started (T2 in FIG. 15A). In the pre-reading operation effect, the production actor 71 moves from the initial position (see FIG. 4A) to the advance position (see FIG. 4C), and the enemy character is almost entirely in the visible area of the liquid crystal screen 5. The enemy character image 56 that imitates the image is displayed large.

  In the present embodiment, the effect actor 71 is operated during the pre-reading operation effect, and the effect agent 71 is maintained in a state where it is arranged at the advanced position. For this reason, depending on the action of the director 71 during the enemy character pre-reading effect, it is not known how many times the special symbol determination has been executed since the enemy character pre-reading effect was started. The player can increase the expectation for the jackpot while considering how long the enemy character look-ahead production will last.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during the pre-reading operation effect, the enemy character image 56 continues to rotate to the left with the face portion of the enemy character as the rotation center. When the rotation angle of the enemy character image 56 at the end of the pre-reading action effect is large, the player may expect that the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed over a relatively large number of special symbol fluctuation displays. . However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol may be variably displayed with three types of variation times (3 seconds, 8 seconds, and 13.5 seconds) during the prefetching operation effect. For this reason, even if the rotation angle of the enemy character image 56 is large, it cannot be generally said that the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed over a relatively large number of special symbol variation displays. Thus, depending on the rotation angle of the enemy character image 56 during the enemy character prefetching effect, it is not known how many times the special symbol determination has been executed since the enemy character prefetching effect was started.

  After that, after the small symbol has started to be displayed in a non-reach manner and then stopped and displayed twice after pseudo stop, that is, the third symbol after the start of the enemy character prefetching effect) The small symbol variation display is started (FIG. 16G, T5 in FIG. 15A).

  When the pre-reading action effect ends during the small symbol variation display illustrated in FIG. 16G, a transition button effect (mode B) is executed (FIG. 16H, T6 in FIG. 15A). In the transition button effect (aspect B), for example, an effect button image 51 that imitates the effect button 26 that emits red light and is controlled to be in a protruding state, and the remaining time of an effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective are shown. A gauge image 52 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. In addition, the effect actor 71 is not operated, and the effect button 26 emits red light and is controlled to protrude in the same manner as the effect button image 51 indicates.

  As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20, the transition button effect (aspect B) is an effect that has a relatively high reliability with respect to the jackpot. In the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the effect of the enemy character pre-reading effect by executing the transition button effect in a plurality of effect modes capable of recognizing the reliability for the jackpot. There are modes A to D in the mode of the transition button effect, and each mode differs in the mode of the effect button image 51, whether or not the effect actor 71 is operated, and the emission color and height of the effect button 26. During the transition button effect, the effect button 26 emits light with a predetermined light emission color (white, red, and rainbow colors) and is controlled to any height of the protruding state and the normal state. The effect button image 51 is an image simulating the effect button 26 during the transition button effect.

  Thereafter, the transition effect A is executed in response to the end of the transition button effect (FIG. 16I, T7 in FIG. 15A). Transition effects include transition effects A and transition effects B. The transition effect A is an effect of the motif of the ally character as in SP1, and the transition effect B is the effect of the motif of the enemy character. The transition effect A is, for example, an effect of notifying that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the transition effect B, and that the direct development has progressed to SP1, which is one of the SP reach effects. Further, the transition effect A is an effect in which an effect image in which the friendly characters A and C think about the future is displayed. Production. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher as the teammate character is active, so that the player is relatively more reliable when the transition effect A is executed. Intuitive recognition is possible. A specific effect mode of the transition effect B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the enemy character look-ahead effect is completed by completing the transition effect A, SP1 is started (see FIG. 16J). SP1 is an effect that always develops into SPSP reach production in the final stage or midway of SP1. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while recognizing that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high when SP1 is started.

  For example, when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A23 or the reach variation pattern H23, SPSP2, which is one of the SPSP reach effects, is executed in the middle or at the end of SP1 (FIG. 11). Then, when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the variation pattern A23 for jackpot, the decorative symbol is stopped on the active line in the final stage of SPSP2 and then stopped and the jackpot is notified. Become. On the other hand, when the variation production pattern is determined corresponding to the variation pattern for reach H23, the decorative symbol is stopped on the active line in a manner of losing at the end of SPSP2, and then the losing is notified. Become.

  Further, for example, when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the big hit variation pattern A29 or the reach variation pattern H29, SPSP1 which is one of the SPSP reach effects is executed in the middle or at the end of SP1. . When the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A23, the jackpot is notified at the end of SPSP1, and when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the reach variation pattern H23, it is lost at the end of SPSP2. Will be notified.

  As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 18, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of times the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified during the enemy character prefetching effect (that is, the number of times the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), A configuration with a relatively high reliability for the jackpot is adopted (up to three times in this embodiment). When the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed before the third change of the pre-reading target, the scenario of the enemy character pre-reading effect that the determination result of the big hit determination related to the pre-reading target is executed from the three changes before the loss is lost. Is easy to determine. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 16, since the enemy character pre-reading effect has been started before three changes, the player can enjoy the game while enhancing the expectation for the jackpot.

In other embodiments, during the pre-reading operation effect, the effect agent 71 may be intermittently operated (or reciprocated) between the advance position and the initial position. For example, every time the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified, the effect mode may be varied depending on the operation pattern or the light emission pattern of the effect actor 71. In such a configuration, even if the player does not pay attention to how many times the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can visually recognize the directing agent 71 and perform a special symbol during the enemy character look-ahead effect. It is possible to recognize that the determination has been performed a plurality of times (three times in the example of FIG. 16).
For example, as the difference in the operation pattern of the production actor 71, the operation speed, the operated component (see FIG. 4), and the distance from the initial position (see FIG. 4A) may be varied.
In addition, as the difference in the light emission pattern of the effect agent 71, the presence / absence of light emission, the light emission color, and the position of the light emitting element to emit light may be varied. For example, the emission color may be made different depending on the number of fluctuations before the enemy character pre-reading effect is started. May emit white light. Also, for example, in the case where the luminescent color of the director 71 can be changed stepwise in the order of white → blue → red, if it starts from before 3 changes, it can develop to red, and start from before 2 changes If it starts, it can develop up to blue, and if it starts from one change before, it may emit only in white. In such a case, during an enemy character look-ahead effect, for example, white is emitted before the third change, blue is emitted before the second change, red is emitted before the first change, and the emission color is changed stepwise to increase the expectation for the jackpot. It is possible. It should be noted that the luminescent color to which the effect actor 71 is developed may be set based on whether or not it is a big hit and the type of variation pattern corresponding to the prefetch target.

  Further, in another embodiment, every time the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified, the movement of the enemy character image 56 during the pre-reading motion effect is different (difference in rotation speed, difference in rotation direction, enlarged display or reduced display). Or the like may be generated. In the case of such a configuration, for example, even if the player does not pay attention to how many times the small symbols are stopped and displayed, due to the difference in the movement of the enemy character image 56, during the enemy character look-ahead effect, It is possible to recognize the number of executed special symbol determinations. As a specific example, the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified three times during the enemy character look-ahead effect in the example shown in FIG. 16, and is notified once during the enemy character look-ahead effect in the example shown in FIG. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 16, the number of times that the difference in movement of the enemy character image 56 is increased.

  Thereafter, in a non-reach mode, a small symbol for reporting a loss is pseudo-stopped, and then is stopped and displayed for a predetermined symbol determination period (for example, 1 second) (T3 in FIG. 16E and FIG. 15A). Subsequently, the small symbols start to be displayed in response to the fact that the first special symbol determination is suspended (FIG. 16F, T4 in FIG. 15A). In the present embodiment, the enemy character prefetching effect is a prefetching effect that can be executed before the first to third fluctuations of the prefetching target. If the enemy character pre-reading effect is started in a state where there are a plurality of special symbol determination holds, the player cannot determine which hold is a pre-read target. For this reason, the player can watch the progress of the enemy character look-ahead effect while increasing the expectation for the jackpot.

  It should be noted that, for example, during the enemy character prefetching effect due to the difference in the effect sound output by the speaker 24 during the enemy character prefetching effect (for example, the difference in the presence or absence of the stereophonic effect) and the background image of the enemy character image 56. The number of special symbol determinations performed may be suggested, and the degree of reliability for jackpots may be suggested.

  Further, during the enemy character pre-reading effect, a character indicating the remaining number of special symbol determinations executed until the special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target may be displayed.

  Note that a pre-reading effect that suggests the degree of reliability for the jackpot may be executed according to the winning sound output from the speaker 24 in accordance with the winning of the game ball at the start opening or the display mode of the hold icon. In addition, a light-emitting element (not shown) such as an LED is built in the game board 2 around the start opening, and light is emitted in various light emission patterns according to the winning of a game ball to the start opening, thereby improving the reliability for the big hit A pre-reading effect that suggests may be executed. In the present embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect is an effect that has a relatively high degree of reliability with respect to the jackpot, and other pre-reading effects with a relatively high degree of reliability correspond to the hold related to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect. It is likely to be executed. For this reason, when a hold corresponding to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect occurs, a special prize sound (for example, Pyon, for example) as a special effect different from normal (for example, no winning sound output, no light emitting element light emission) Sound) is likely to be output. For example, when a special winning sound is output, the player can recognize that the probability that the determination result of the special symbol determination corresponding to the hold is a big hit is higher than usual when the hold occurs. Then, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is started later, it is possible to enjoy the game while guessing that the hold in which the special winning sound is output will be the pre-read target.

[Specific examples of enemy character look-ahead effects performed before one change]
Next, a specific example of the enemy character pre-reading effect executed before one change will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 shows a specific example corresponding to the production flow illustrated in FIG.

  FIG. 17 shows a specific variation effect based on the variation effect pattern associated with the jackpot variation pattern A10, A20, A23, A26, or A29, or the reach variation pattern H10, H20, H23, H26, or H29. An example of various production modes is shown. In this specific example, a case will be described in which an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario that starts from one change before the target of pre-reading is determined in advance when the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed from one to three fluctuations before. . In the enemy character pre-reading effect, it is assumed that the transition button effect is executed in the mode A (see FIG. 17G) and the transition effect B is executed as the transition effect.

  For example, after the decorative symbol that notifies the loss is stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol area 50 (see FIG. 17A), the hold of the first special symbol determination is digested without executing the reach effect. Go. Thereafter, for example, when the decorative symbol variation display is started with the number of the first special symbol determination being held at one (see FIG. 17B), a predetermined timing (for example, 0) after the decorative symbol variation display is started. The enemy character pre-reading effect starts in 5 seconds (see FIG. 14).

  When the enemy character look-ahead effect is started, the look-ahead operation effect is executed after the screen reduction effect is executed, and the effect agent 71 moves to the advance position (see FIG. 4C) and is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. An enemy character image 56 is displayed (see FIGS. 17C and 17D).

  After that, the small symbol for reporting the loss in a non-reach mode is stopped and displayed after being pseudo-stopped (T8 in FIGS. 17E and 15B). Subsequently, the small symbols start to be displayed in response to the fact that the first special symbol determination is suspended (FIG. 17F, T9 in FIG. 15B). Then, the pre-reading operation effect ends during the small symbol variation display, and the transition button effect (mode A) is executed (T10 in FIGS. 17G and 15B). In the transition button effect (Aspect A), for example, the effect actor 71 is not operated, and the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state that emits white light are displayed, and the effect button 26 emits white light in the normal state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17H, the transition effect B is executed in response to the end of the transition button effect (T11 in FIG. 15B). In the present embodiment, the transition effect B is an effect in which an effect image in which a plurality (may be integrated) of enemy characters marches is displayed, and suggests that the effect directly develops into SP1 or SP2 that is an SP reach effect (or Notification). Further, the transition effect B is an effect that is less reliable for the jackpot than the transition effect A and has a higher relevance to SP2 than SP1. In the present embodiment, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low as the teammate character is inferior (that is, the enemy character is dominant). The player may intuitively feel anxiety that the reliability may be relatively low when the transition effect B is executed.

  The transition button effect (aspect A) and the transition effect B are effects in the effect mode in which the reliability for the jackpot is not relatively high. In the example shown in FIG. 17, before the enemy character pre-reading effect is started (although the variation display mode of the decorative pattern before the second and third changes of the pre-reading target is non-reachable, the enemy character pre-reading is performed from one change before. For this reason, the player, for example, does not feel that the reliability for the jackpot is not low but feels too high, and the player makes a transition while hoping to develop directly into SP1 with a relatively high reliability for the jackpot. There is a possibility of watching the progress of stage B.

  In the present embodiment, when the transition effect B is completed, it is set in advance so that it directly develops to SP1 at a rate of about 30% and directly develops to SP2 having a lower reliability than SP1 at a rate of about 70%. (See FIGS. 17 (I) and (J), FIG. 22). For example, when the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern A10 or the reach variation pattern H10, after the enemy character look-ahead effect is completed, it directly develops to SP2, and the winning is notified at SP2 (FIG. 11). When the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the big hit variation pattern A20 or the reach variation pattern H20, SPSP3, which is one of the SPSP reach effects, is executed after the direct development to SP2, and the winning is notified. Become. When the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the big hit variation pattern A26 or the reach variation pattern H26, SPSP1, which is one of the SPSP reach effects, is executed after the direct development to SP2, and the winning is notified. Become. When the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the big hit variation pattern A23 or the reach variation pattern H23, SPSP2 which is one of the SPSP reach effects is executed after the direct development to SP1, and the winning is notified. Become. When the variation effect pattern is determined corresponding to the big hit variation pattern A29 or the reach variation pattern H29, SPSP1 is executed after the direct development to SP2, and the winning is notified.

[An example of the ratio that determines whether or not to prefetch enemy characters]
Next, an example of a determination ratio regarding the presence or absence of enemy character prefetching effects will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, when the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed, the sub-CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the enemy character pre-reading effect, and if so, how many changes before the start. To decide. For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to an enemy character pre-reading effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and executes an enemy character pre-reading effect execution random number (step of FIG. 46), which is one of the random numbers for effect control. A lottery using S133) is performed. Then, for example, scenarios are determined at different rates depending on the type of variation pattern corresponding to the prefetch target. The enemy character look-ahead effect execution lottery table shows, for example, whether the enemy character look-ahead effect can be started from the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead target, the type of variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead target, It is a table in which a character pre-reading effect start target (including no execution) and a determination value for comparison with an enemy character pre-reading effect execution random number value are associated in advance. As an example, in the enemy character pre-reading effect execution lottery table, a determination value for comparison with the value of the enemy character pre-reading effect execution random number is allocated at a rate illustrated in FIG. FIG. 18 illustrates the ratio of the number of determination values, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the execution character random number for prefetching enemy characters.

  As an example, a case will be described in which the variation pattern to be prefetched is A10, and all the variation patterns before the first to third variations are variation patterns of 13.5 seconds or less. In such a case, it is determined that the enemy character look-ahead effect is not executed at a rate of 35%, while the rate of 17% is from 1 change before, the rate of 23% is from 2 before change, and the rate of 25% is 3 changes. It is determined that the enemy character look-ahead effect will be executed from the front. Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, the range of “0 to 34” is set to “no execution”, and the range of “35 to 51” is set to “from before one change”. Allocated. In addition, the range of “52 to 74” is assigned to “before 2 changes”, and the range of “75 to 99” is assigned to “before 3 changes”.

  In the present embodiment, in advance, the greater the number of times the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified during the enemy character look-ahead effect (that is, the number of times the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high. Is set. Further, the direct development to the reach production (SP1 in the present embodiment) having a relatively high reliability is more reliable than the direct development to the reach production (SP2 in the present embodiment) having a lower reliability. It is preset so as to increase the degree.

  Specifically, when the pre-reading target is a big hit, the rate at which the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed (the rate determined other than “no execution”) is higher than when it is a loss. When the enemy character look-ahead effect is executed, the degree of expectation to develop into the SPSP reach effect is greater than that of the SP reach effect (ie, SP2). Further, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed, the expectation degree that SP1 is executed as the SP reach effect is greater than the expectation degree that SP2 is executed.

  In addition, when the prefetch target is a big hit, it is easier to determine a scenario in which the enemy character prefetch effect is executed before the third change than when it is a loss. The scenario in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed from before the third change has a higher expectation to develop from the SP reach effect to the SPSP reach effect than the scenario that is executed from before the first change. In addition, the scenario in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed before the third change has a higher expectation that SP1 is executed as the SP reach effect than the scenario that is executed before the first change.

  With this setting, if the enemy character look-ahead effect can be executed from before 3 changes, the reliability for the jackpot is high in the order of execution before 3 changes> execution before 2 changes> execution before 1 change> no execution. It is preset so that Also, if it can be executed from before 2 changes, it will be executed from before 2 changes> execute from before 1 change> no execution, and if it can be executed from before 1 change, it will execute from before 1 change> in order of no execution. It is set in advance so as to increase the reliability for the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when it is possible to execute from before the second change, when it can be executed from before the second change, when it is possible to execute from before the second change, when it is executed from before the second change, It is set in advance so as to increase the reliability for the big hit. In addition, when it is possible to execute from before one change when it can be executed from before three changes or before two changes, the case where it is executed from before one change when it is possible to execute from before one change is a big hit Is set in advance so as to increase the reliability.

  With such a setting, for example, an enemy character look-ahead effect with higher reliability for jackpots is executed than when there is a large number of holdings for the first special symbol determination, so that a game ball is launched to hold the game. Motivation can be given to the player. Also, as an example, when the number of first special symbol determination hold is the same, the direction in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is started after the reach loss is more reliable than the case where the enemy character pre-reading effect is started after the loss notification in the non-reach mode Can be high.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a group of notice effects that indicate that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high by causing a large number of the same or similar characters to appear on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the determination result of the special symbol determination. A notice effect can be executed. By the way, in this embodiment, the effect actor 71 has a pattern imitating a plurality of enemy characters. When such an effect character 71 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal screen 5 and an enemy character prefetching effect in which the enemy character image 56 is displayed is executed, a large number of the same characters appear. Thereby, it is possible to give the player the same impression as when the group notice effect is executed. For this reason, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high. Further, in the present embodiment, it is set in advance that the reliability for the big hit is relatively higher when the enemy character is displayed than when the enemy character is displayed at the end of the enemy character look-ahead effect (that is, the transition effect). (See FIG. 21). Thus, in this embodiment, the enemy character prefetching effect which is the effect of the effect aspect similar to a group notice effect can be performed based on prior determination information. Further, it can be suggested that the appearance of the predetermined character (here, the ally character) at the end of the enemy character look-ahead effect has a relatively high reliability with respect to the jackpot than the case where the predetermined character does not appear. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the effect in the effect mode similar to the group notice effect using the effect actor 71. As a result, it is possible to effectively produce an effect that tends to be monotonous only by producing an effect image on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which scenarios are determined at different rates depending on the type of variation pattern corresponding to the prefetch target. In other embodiments, regardless of the type of variation pattern, the enemy character pre-reading effect scenario may be determined at different ratios depending on whether the game is a big hit or not.

  Moreover, the determination ratio about the presence or absence of enemy character prefetching effect illustrated in FIG. 18 is only an example, and any determination ratio may be used. For example, in another embodiment, the smaller the number of times the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified during the enemy character look-ahead effect (that is, the number of times the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), the higher the reliability for the jackpot. It may be preset as follows. In such a case, it is possible to recognize that the reliability with respect to the jackpot is relatively high due to the performance aspect having a sense of speed.

  In another embodiment, when the number of times the determination result of the special symbol determination is notified during the enemy character look-ahead effect is a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), the reliability for the jackpot is higher than the case other than this number. It may be set in advance so as to be relatively high. In such a case, it is possible to give the player motivation to pay attention to the progress of the fluctuating effect during the enemy character look-ahead effect.

  In another embodiment, the reliability for the jackpot may not be suggested by the number of determination results of the special symbol determination that is notified during the enemy character prefetching effect. For example, it is set in advance so that the determination ratio for starting the enemy character pre-reading effect is equally determined regardless of the ratio before 1 to 3 fluctuations.

  In another embodiment, when the number of determination results of the special symbol determination that is notified during the enemy character look-ahead effect is relatively large (or small), or by a predetermined number (for example, three times), It may be suggested that the possibility that the prefetch target is determined to be a jackpot advantageous for the player (for example, jackpot symbol A) is relatively high. In another embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect itself is relatively high, and it is relatively likely that the special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-read target is determined to be a big hit advantageous to the player. You may suggest.

[Example of transition button production]
(Produce mode of button effect)
Next, a transition button effect that is one of the effects constituting the enemy character look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. First, an example of various button effects that prompt the player to operate the effect button 26 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, button effects that prompt the player to operate the effect buttons 26 are executed at various timings. The button effect is an effect that uses the liquid crystal screen 5, the effect button 26, and the effect agent 71 (the effect agent 71 may not be used). In the present embodiment, a transition button effect is prepared in advance as one of the button effects executed during the variable effect, and a judge button effect (described later) is provided in advance as one of the button effects executed during the jackpot game. It is prepared. For these button effects, four types of modes A to D are prepared in advance, which are different in the type of the effect button image 51, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect agent 71, and the difference in the state of the effect button 26. For example, in the button effect executed during the changing effect, the reliability for the jackpot is set differently for each effect mode, and the reliability is set in advance in the order of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D. Yes. In the button effect executed during the jackpot game, the degree of possibility of being a jackpot advantageous to the player is made different for each effect mode, and the level of advantage increases in the order of mode A, mode B, mode C, and mode D. Is set in advance.

  For example, the mode A displays the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 imitating the effect button 26 in the normal state that emits white light without the operation of the effect agent 71 on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the effect button 26. Is emitted in white in a normal state (see FIG. 19A). The mode B displays the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 imitating the projecting effect button 26 emitting light in red without the operation of the effect agent 71, and the effect button 26 emitting light in red. This is a mode in which the protrusion is controlled (see FIG. 19B). In the aspect C, the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 imitating the effect button 26 in a protruding state that emits red light as the effect agent 71 is moved from the initial position to the advanced position (see FIG. 4). This is a mode in which the effect button 26 that is displayed in red and is controlled to be in a protruding state (see FIG. 19C). The aspect D displays the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 that imitate the effect button 26 in the protruding state emitted in rainbow as the effect agent 71 is moved from the initial position to the advanced position. This is a mode in which the effect button 26 that is rainbow-colored is controlled to project (see FIG. 19D). Thus, during the button production, the production button 26 is controlled so as to be in the same state as the production button image 51 shows, and the button lamp 262 emits light (always lights). When the button effect is executed in the aspects C and D, when the button effect ends, the effect accessory 71 returns to the initial position.

  In this embodiment, the case where the modes of the button image 51 are the four types exemplified in the modes A to D will be described, but the mode of the button image 51 is not limited to this. In another embodiment, for example, the button image 51 that occupies a large area on the liquid crystal screen 5 may be displayed as the reliability of the jackpot is high or the probability that the jackpot is advantageous to the player is high. . Further, the button image 51 may include a word (for example, a word such as “Press!”) That prompts the player to operate the effect button 26. The wording that prompts the operation may include reliability information for suggesting the degree of reliability for the jackpot. For example, the wording related to the operation such as “Press!” And the word indirectly related to the operation are displayed. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, a case where the gauge image 52 has one mode will be described. In another embodiment, for example, a plurality of modes (for example, four types) may be prepared in advance in the gauge image 52, and the reliability for the big hit may be suggested by the mode of the gauge image 52. For example, a gauge image for informing that the jackpot is determined may be prepared in advance, or a gauge image 52 having a larger area on the liquid crystal screen 5 may be displayed as the reliability for the jackpot is higher. In addition, a gauge image for notifying that the jackpot is advantageous for the player may be prepared in advance, and the higher the degree of possibility that the jackpot is advantageous for the player, the larger the area occupied on the liquid crystal screen 5 A gauge image 52 may be displayed. Further, the reliability applied to the jackpot (or the degree of advantage of the jackpot for the player) may be suggested by the pattern applied to the gauge image 52. As an example, a reliability suggestion pattern that suggests reliability is applied to the portion indicating the remaining time of the effective time, and even if the reliability suggestion pattern cannot be recognized (or is difficult to recognize) as time passes, It may be good or easy to recognize.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the enemy character pre-reading effect, the effect of operating the effect agent 71 is continuously executed as in the case where the transition button effect of the mode C or D is executed following the pre-reading operation effect. May be. In such a case, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 may temporarily return the effect actor 71 to the initial position between the two effects. Alternatively, the director 71 may be continuously arranged at the advance position without returning to the initial position.

(Example of determination ratio for each production mode of transition button production)
Next, an example of the determination ratio for each effect mode of the transition button effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed, the transition button effect effect mode is determined as one of the button effect modes A to D described with reference to FIG. As described above, the types of the effect button images 51 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect agent 71, and the state of the effect buttons 26 are different in the modes A to D. For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 uses the transition button effect random number (step S1605 in FIG. 50) as one of the effect control random numbers based on the type of the change effect pattern corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. The mode of the transition button effect is determined by lottery using (see). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a transition button effect determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 and performs a lottery using a transition button effect random number. The transition button effect determination table is compared with, for example, whether or not it is a big hit, the type of variation effect pattern corresponding to the prefetch target, the transition mode effect modes (that is, modes A to D), and the value of the transition button effect random number. It is the table which matched the judgment value for this beforehand. As an example, in the transition button effect determination table, a determination value for comparison with the value of the transition button effect random number is allocated at a rate illustrated in FIG. FIG. 20 exemplifies the determination ratio, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the transition button effect random number.

  In the present embodiment, the mode of the transition button effect is determined, for example, at a determination ratio according to the content of the variation effect corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect and whether it is a big hit. Specifically, when the prefetch target is a jackpot, the transition button effect mode is set in advance so that it can be easily determined other than the mode A (see FIG. 20). On the other hand, when the pre-read target is lost, the transition button effect mode is easily determined as the mode A and is set in advance so as not to be determined as the mode D. And regardless of whether it is a big hit or not, for example, when SP1 is executed as an SP reach effect, the mode of the transition button effect is determined more easily than the mode A than when SP2 is executed. It is set in advance.

  Specifically, for example, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern A10, and a variation effect pattern in which a jackpot is notified at the end of SP2, the mode of the transition button effect is determined to be mode A at a rate of 41%. Determined to be aspect B at a rate of 44%, determined to be aspect C at a rate of 14%, and determined to be aspect D at a rate of 1%. Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, a range of “0 to 40” is allocated to the aspect A, and a range of “41 to 84” is allocated to the aspect B. The range “85 to 98” is allocated to the mode C, and “99” is allocated to the mode D.

  Further, for example, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern A20 or A26, and a variation effect pattern in which a jackpot is notified at the end of the SPSP reach effect via SP2, the pattern is determined to be mode A at a rate of 37%. % Is determined in aspect B, 16% in aspect C and 1% in aspect D. Further, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern A23 or A29, and a variation effect pattern in which a jackpot is notified at the end of the SPSP reach effect via SP1, it is determined as mode A at a rate of 30%, and 48% The ratio is determined to be aspect B at a rate of 20%, determined to be aspect C at a rate of 20%, and determined to be aspect D at a rate of 2%.

  On the other hand, for example, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern H10, in which the variation effect pattern is notified of the loss at the end of SP2, the mode A is determined at a rate of 77%, and at a rate of 20%. Determined in aspect B and determined in aspect C at a rate of 3%, but not in aspect D (ie, determined rate 0%). Further, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern H20 or H26 and in which the loss is notified at the end of the SPSP reach effect via SP2, the pattern A is determined at a rate of 65% and is 31%. Is determined in aspect B at a rate of 4% and determined in aspect C at a rate of 4%, but is not determined in aspect D (ie, determined rate 0%). Further, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern H23 or H29 and in which the loss is notified at the end of the SPSP reach effect via SP1, the pattern A is determined at a rate of 60% and is 35%. The ratio is determined in the aspect B at a ratio of 5% and is determined in the aspect C at a ratio of 5%, but is not determined in the aspect D (that is, the determination ratio is 0%).

  With such setting, when the transition button effect of aspect D is executed, the jackpot can be notified. Further, the difference between the effect button image 51 imitating the effect button 26 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect agent 71, the difference in the state of the effect button 26 (normal state, The reliability of the jackpot is suggested by the protruding state and the difference in emission color. Specifically, it can be suggested that the reliability for the jackpot is high in the order of Aspect D> Aspect C> Aspect B> Aspect A.

[Decision rate example for each transition mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, an example of the determination ratio for each effect mode of the transition effect will be described. In the present embodiment, when the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed, the transition effect A or the transition effect B is executed as the transition effect (see FIGS. 16I and 17H). For example, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 uses the transition effect random number (see step S1606 in FIG. 50) as one of the effect control random numbers based on the type of the change effect pattern corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. ) Is used to determine the mode of transition effect as one of transition effect A or transition effect B. For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a transition effect determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 and performs a lottery using a transition effect random number. The transition effect determination table includes, for example, whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the variation effect pattern corresponding to the prefetch target, the effect mode of the transition effect (that is, A or B), and a determination value for comparison with the value of the transition effect random number. Is a table in which As an example, in the transition effect determination table, a determination value for comparison with the value of the transition effect random number is allocated at a rate illustrated in FIG. FIG. 21 illustrates the determination ratio, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the transition effect random number.

  In the present embodiment, the mode of transition effect is determined, for example, by the type of SP reach effect that has been directly developed (that is, SP1 and SP2) and a determination ratio according to whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, when the variation effect pattern corresponding to the prefetch target is a variation effect pattern in which SP2 is executed as the SP reach effect, the transition effect B is determined at a rate of 100% regardless of whether or not it is a big hit. (See FIG. 21). Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, all the determination values are ““ for the variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns A10, A20, A26, H10, H20, and H26. “Transition effect B”.

  On the other hand, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern A23 or A29, which is a jackpot and the variation effect pattern in which SP1 is executed as the SP reach effect, the transition effect A is determined at a ratio of 70%. B is preset so as to be determined at a rate of 30%. Specifically, in the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation patterns A23 and A29, the range of “0 to 69” is assigned to the “transition effect A”, and the range of “70 to 99” is the “transition effect B”. Allocated. Further, in the case of a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern H23 or H29, which is a loss and a variation effect pattern in which SP1 is executed as the SP reach effect, the transition effect A is determined at a rate of 45%. B is preset so as to be determined at a rate of 55%. Specifically, in the variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation patterns H23 and H29, the range of “0 to 44” is assigned to “transition effect A”, and the range of “45 to 99” is “transition effect B”. Allocated.

  With such a setting, it is possible to notify that the transition effect A is executed in the enemy character look-ahead effect and that the SP 1 will develop directly. Moreover, it can be suggested that the possibility of direct development to SP2 is relatively high by executing the transition effect B.

  Note that the determination ratios illustrated in FIGS. 20 and 21 are merely examples, and any determination ratio may be used. For example, in other embodiments, the transition button effect may have only one kind of effect, and the transition button effect may not indicate the reliability for the big hit. In another embodiment, it is not necessary to suggest the type of SP reach production that develops directly according to the production mode of the transition production. In other embodiments, the transition button effect and the transition effect mode may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the jackpot, regardless of the type of the variation effect pattern.

  In other embodiments, the transition button effects modes A to D and the transition effects A and B are associated in advance, and the transition button effect and the transition effect are executed in which effect mode. It may be uniquely determined by one random number lottery. Further, when an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario of how many fluctuations to start the enemy character pre-reading effect is determined, the transition button effect effect mode (any of modes A to D) and the transition effect effect mode (A Or B) may be uniquely determined.

  In other embodiments, the transition button effect and the transition effect may not be executed in the enemy character look-ahead effect. For example, it may be suggested that when the transition button effect and the transition effect are executed, there is a relatively high possibility of developing directly to SP1 as compared to the case where these two effects are not executed.

  In another embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be executed with the start of variable display of the special symbol related to the pre-read target. In another embodiment, the enemy character prefetching effect may be a notice effect instead of the prefetching effect.

[Relationship between enemy character look-ahead effects and other look-ahead effects]
In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects that can be identified by the player as different types of pre-reading effects can be executed. These prefetch effects may be executed in a manner in which some or all of the execution times overlap. However, for example, depending on the content of the performance, when it is executed in a manner in which part or all of the execution time overlaps, it gives the player a complicated impression as a whole, and allows a plurality of types of pre-reading effects to be executed. On the contrary, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced. Further, it is difficult for the player to recognize each effect, and it may be difficult to identify what effect is being executed. Such a problem may occur not only between the pre-read effects but also between the pre-read effects and the notice effects, or between the notice effects.

  Here, in this embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect cannot be executed unless the changing effect after the changing effect whose decoration symbol change display mode is reach lose is completed. With such a configuration, as a result, an effect that is prioritized and an effect that is not prioritized occur, and various effects can be executed in an appropriate manner. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problems as described above, and to effectively enhance the production effect and improve the interest of the game.

  As an example, the relationship between the “chance eye look-ahead effect” and the enemy character look-ahead effect executed using the liquid crystal screen 5, the frame lamp 37, and the like, which are the same effect means as the enemy character look-ahead effect, will be described. The chance look-ahead effect is a chance chance (for example, “1” determined in advance during the change effect until the decorative symbol change display corresponding to the look-ahead target of the chance look-ahead effect (ie, the special symbol change display) is started. The combination of “3” and “7”) is an effect in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed immediately after the pseudo stop on the liquid crystal screen 5. Except for the period when the display is stopped (determined) at the chance, the decoration symbol that is displayed at the chance will be changed according to the fact that the first hold is consumed. When the display is started, an effect image (not shown) is attached to the decorative design.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, when the execution of the chance look-ahead effect is determined by the sub CPU 131, the scenario of the chance look-ahead effect is determined. The scenario of the chance look-ahead effect includes the chance look-ahead effect configuration, such as whether the chance look-ahead effect starts from before 1 change or 2 changes, and finally, what color effect image is displayed. It is the original. The color of the effect image can be developed in the order of blue → red.

  In a chance look-ahead effect, when a red effect image is added to a decorative pattern, a reach effect is always executed corresponding to the look-ahead object of the chance look-ahead effect. Further, in the chance look-ahead effect, if a blue effect image is added to the decorative pattern, there is a possibility that the reach effect is executed corresponding to the look-ahead target of the chance look-ahead effect. By providing such a chance look-ahead effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and to improve the interest of the game.

  The chance look-ahead effect is an effect that draws the player's attention to the decorative symbol, but if such an effect is executed simultaneously with an enemy character pre-reading effect (for example, see FIG. 16D) that reduces the visibility of the decorative symbol. If this is the case, it becomes complicated as a whole, and there is a possibility that the production effect of the production cannot be enhanced effectively.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the enemy character pre-reading effect and the chance look-ahead effect are not executed simultaneously. Specifically, a configuration is adopted in which the enemy character pre-reading effect is prioritized and executed even if the execution of the chance look-ahead effect in which the variation display mode of the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading object is non-reach has already been determined. doing. On the other hand, when the pre-reading target of the chance pre-reading effect is a jackpot and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern related to the pre-reading object is reach lose, the enemy character pre-reading effect cannot be executed, and as a result, the chance pre-reading effect has priority. Will be executed.

  Hereinafter, the execution possibility of the enemy character pre-reading effect when the execution of the chance look-ahead effect is determined will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the feasibility of executing the enemy character pre-reading effect when execution of the chance look-ahead effect is determined. Note that reference numerals 541 to 544 in FIG. 22 correspond to the hold icons 541 to 544 described with reference to FIG. Further, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold (the hold icon 544 in FIG. 13 (B-1), 544 in FIGS. 22 (A) to (C)) that may be a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. It is assumed that a loss is notified in a non-reach manner when the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed when a hold occurs.

  For example, the decorative display variation display mode relating to the look-ahead target (holding icon 542 of 13 (B-1), 542 of FIG. 22 (A)) is non-reach, and starts blue before the second variation and finally becomes blue A case where a chance look-ahead effect scenario for displaying an effect image is determined will be described. When the enemy character pre-reading effect is not executed, the chance look-ahead effect is executed based on the scenario as illustrated in FIG.

  On the other hand, a case will be described in which a hold (hold icon 544 in FIG. 13 (B-1), 544 in FIG. 22 (B)) that may be a prefetch target for enemy character prefetch effects occurs. In this case, the chance look-ahead effect based on the scenario may not be executed when the decorative symbol variation display mode related to the look-ahead of the chance look-ahead effect is non-reach (see FIG. 22B).

  Specifically, in such a case, in this embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed from before 1 to 3 fluctuations, including the hold related to the pre-read target of the chance eye pre-reading effect. For example, when an enemy character pre-reading scenario in which an enemy character pre-reading effect is to be started from three changes before (the hold icon 541 in FIG. 13B-1 and 541 in FIG. 22B) is determined, the enemy character pre-reading is determined. When the hold after the start of the effect is digested and the content of the variable effect is determined, the above scenario of the chance look-ahead effect determined with the hold related to the hold icon 542 as the read-ahead target is not referred to (or the scenario is discarded) ) For this reason, for example, even if a scenario of a chance look-ahead effect that starts from two changes before and finally displays a blue effect image is determined as in FIG. Thereafter, the chance look-ahead effect based on the scenario is not executed (see FIG. 22B).

  In addition, when the decorative symbol that was variably displayed when a hold that may be a target of pre-reading for the enemy character pre-reading effect is pseudo-stopped at the chance, a blue effect image is added ( (See FIGS. 22B and 22C). This is because the setting information of the changing effect including the setting information of the chance look-ahead effect that sets the hold related to the hold icon 542 as the read-ahead target at the start of the change display of the decorative symbol before the hold corresponding to 544 occurs is image sound. This is because the execution of the chance look-ahead effect cannot be prevented because it is set in the control RAM 145 of the control board 140.

  Next, referring to FIG. 22C, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol related to the pre-read target (for example, 542 in FIG. 22A) is reach lose, which starts from two before the variation and is finally red. A case where a chance look-ahead effect scenario of displaying an effect image is determined will be described. In such a case, in this embodiment, the hold related to the prefetch target of the chance eye prefetch effect is not included, and the enemy character prefetch effect can be executed from the subsequent hold (before one change). Therefore, the chance look-ahead effect is executed based on the determined chance look-ahead effect scenario. That is, at the time of a pseudo stop at a chance related to one pre-change of the prefetch target (corresponding to the hold icon 541), and at the start of the change display in response to the prefetch target being digested, the decorative design is red. An effect image will be added.

  In another embodiment, the execution of the chance look-ahead effect may be controlled so that the enemy character look-ahead effect is prioritized even if execution of the chance look-ahead effect is already determined, regardless of the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect. Further, in another embodiment, if the execution of the chance look-ahead effect is already determined regardless of the effect mode of the chance look-ahead effect, the chance look-ahead already determined to be executed rather than the enemy character look-ahead effect. The production may be controlled to be executable with priority.

  In another embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect and the chance eye pre-reading effect may be executed in a manner in which some or all of the execution times overlap. For example, the special symbol determination hold may be the same for the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect and the prefetch target of the chance eye prefetch effect. When the enemy character pre-reading effect and the chance eye pre-reading effect partially or entirely overlap, the following control may be performed.

  For example, when the small symbol (see the symbol area 50 in FIG. 16E) is pseudo-stopped at the chance eye during the enemy character look-ahead effect and when the small symbol stopped and displayed at the chance eye starts variable display, An effect image (not shown) may be attached to the symbol.

  When the chance look-ahead effect using a small pattern is executed during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the effect character 71 may be maintained in the state where it is placed at the advance position. In addition, when the small symbol is pseudo-stopped at the chance, the stage actor 71 is retracted to the initial position or a position closer to the initial position than the advance position, and the small symbol stopped and displayed at the chance starts to be displayed in a variable manner. At that time, the director 71 may be advanced to the advance position.

  In addition, when a chance look-ahead effect using a small pattern is executed during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the effect sound related to the chance look-ahead effect (for example, the effect sound “Shan”) is not output, and the enemy character look-ahead effect is related. The production sound may be output with priority. Also, the effect sound related to the chance look-ahead effect may be output at a relatively small volume (eg, volume 30%) compared to the volume of the effect sound related to the enemy character look-ahead effect (eg, volume 100%). In addition, regarding the light emission control of the frame lamp 37 and the like, the control corresponding to the enemy character pre-reading effect may be preferentially executed without executing the control corresponding to the chance look-ahead effect.

  Further, for example, the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect and the chance eye prefetch effect may be the same. In such a case, the effect sound related to the chance look-ahead effect may be output at a volume (eg, volume 100%) that is relatively larger than the volume (eg, volume 70%) of the effect sound related to the enemy character look-ahead effect. . Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize how many pre-changes the enemy character pre-reading effect has started with the effect sound and the effect image related to the chance look-ahead effect.

  Further, in another embodiment, on the condition that the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetching effect is a big hit, even if the execution of the chance prefetching effect has already been decided, The effect may be executed in a manner in which part or all of the execution time overlaps. For example, a big hit hold may be set as a prefetch target for both the enemy character prefetch effect and the chance eye prefetch effect. In such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the jackpot is confirmed by executing two types of pre-reading effects that are not normally executed at the same time during the same period. For example, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the jackpot before the SP reach effect (that is, SP1 or SP2) related to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect is started.

  In addition to the chance look-ahead effect, priority is given to the enemy character look-ahead effect over any effect included in the variable effect (for example, a speech effect (one of the notice effects) that displays the lines of the friendly characters on the LCD screen 5). May be. Moreover, you may give priority to other productions (for example, group notice) included in a variation production over enemy character prefetching production.

[Variation of the relationship with the reach production related to the suspension of the previous special symbol determination]
Here, the enemy as described with reference to FIG. 13C even when the reach effect (for example, normal 1) is relatively low in the reliability of the jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. If the configuration in which the character prefetching effect cannot be executed is adopted, the effect of the effect may be lowered.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, for example, when each variation pattern related to 1-3 variations before the variation pattern related to the prefetch target is shorter in the variation time of the special symbol, the enemy character prefetch effect can be executed. If it is long, the enemy character look-ahead effect may not be executed. In addition, for example, when the reach effect corresponding to 1 to 3 changes before is relatively less reliable than the reach effect corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character pre-read effect, the change related to 1 to 3 changes before the change It may be possible to execute an enemy character look-ahead effect during the performance.

  Specifically, for example, a reach effect (for example, SPSP1) having a relatively high degree of reliability with respect to the big hit than the reach effect (for example, SP2) corresponding to the pre-read target of the enemy character pre-read effect is held before the pre-read target (for example, SPSP1). In the case of being executed in response to (losing), control is performed so that the enemy character pre-reading effect cannot be executed during the changing effect corresponding to the hold. On the other hand, a reach effect (for example, normal 1) having a relatively lower reliability than a reach effect (for example, SP2) corresponding to a prefetch target of an enemy character prefetch effect corresponds to a hold (loss) before the prefetch target. If executed, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be controlled to be executable even during the changing effect corresponding to the suspension. For example, the following configuration can prevent a situation in which the continuity of the enemy character look-ahead effect is impaired even if the reach effect is interrupted during the enemy character look-ahead effect.

  In the case where the execution times of the enemy character look-ahead effect and the reach effect during the change effect related to 1 to 3 fluctuations overlap, the following control may be performed in order to prioritize the enemy character look-ahead effect over the reach effect. For example, even if the reach effect is started during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the aspect of the enemy character look-ahead effect is not changed. For example, the reach effect image related to the reach effect (for example, the reach effect image related to normal 1) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. The reach design may be quasi-stopped with a small design without being displayed on the screen. In the case of this configuration, the effect sound preset as the effect sound of the reach effect is not output from the speaker 24 even when the reach effect is started, and the effect sound output by executing the enemy character pre-reading effect. It is desirable to output with priority. In addition, regarding the light emission control of each light emitting element, it is desirable not to execute the control corresponding to the reach effect, but to execute the control corresponding to the enemy character pre-reading effect with priority.

Alternatively, when the reach effect is started as the change effect related to the first to third changes during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the reach effect image related to the reach effect (for example, the reach effect image related to SP3) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 accordingly. May be displayed. In this case, the director 71 may be kept at the advanced position, may be withdrawn to the initial position with the start of the reach effect, or the initial position and the advanced position with the start of the reach effect. May be retracted to an intermediate position.
Then, for example, the effect image (for example, the enemy character image 56) related to the enemy character look-ahead effect is erased from the liquid crystal screen 5 until the lost decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the end of the reach effect related to 1 to 3 fluctuations. Alternatively, it may be displayed with being superimposed on the reach effect image related to the reach effect with an opacity of 100% or less (for example, an opacity of 30%).
Further, the liquid crystal screen 5 may be virtually divided into a plurality of display areas, and an area for displaying a reach effect image related to the reach effect and an area for displaying an effect image related to the enemy character pre-reading effect may be provided.
In addition, while the enemy character look-ahead effect is executed using the entire area of the liquid crystal screen 5, the reach effect image related to the reach effect is superimposed on (or not superimposed on) the effect image related to the enemy character look-ahead effect. 5 may be reduced and displayed in an area (for example, the lower left area) which is a part of the area 5.
When the reach effect image related to the reach effect corresponding to 1 to 3 fluctuations is displayed during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the enemy character look-ahead effect is executed as the effect sound set in advance as the effect sound of the reach effect. The volume may be output at a relatively low volume (for example, 30% volume) compared to the volume of the effect sound (for example, volume 100%) that is output. Also, in order to preferentially output the effect sound that is output when the reach effect is executed, it is compared with the volume of the effect sound that is output when the enemy character look-ahead effect is executed (for example, volume 40%). Thus, the output may be performed at a relatively large volume (for example, volume 100%). Similarly, regarding the light emission control of each light emitting element, the control related to the enemy character look-ahead effect may be performed with priority over the control related to the reach effect, or the control related to the reach effect may be prioritized.

  Alternatively, when the reach effect during the change effect corresponding to the hold before the first to the third change is started during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the player may be allowed to select whether to view the reach effect. For example, during the enemy character look-ahead effect, the player can operate the effect button 26 by displaying a word on the liquid crystal screen 5 to operate the effect button 26 if he / she wants to see the reach effect corresponding to the hold before 1 to 3 fluctuations. A button effect for prompting the user may be executed. Then, the reach effect corresponding to the hold before the 1st to the 3rd change may be controlled so as to be visible on condition that the effect button 26 is operated during the button effect. When the reach effect becomes visible, the control similar to the above-described configuration (the configuration in which the reach effect image related to the reach effect corresponding to 1 to 3 changes before the enemy character pre-read effect is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5) is performed. Also good.

  In another embodiment, when the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect is a big hit, what reach effect is executed based on the special symbol determination hold (losing) held before the pre-reading target. Even if it is a case, you may control so that enemy character pre-reading production can be performed from any before 1-3 fluctuations. In this case, it is informed that the jackpot is confirmed by executing the reach effect related to the hold before the 1st to 3rd fluctuations during the enemy character pre-reading effect (that is, the fluctuation pattern is a relatively long fluctuation pattern). it can.

[Relationship with variation effect related to second special symbol determination]
In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the second special symbol determination is performed with priority over the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 38). Then, even if the second special symbol determination is executed during the enemy character look-ahead effect and the fluctuating effect based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination is executed, a configuration is adopted in which the execution of the enemy character look-ahead effect is continued. Yes.

  However, for example, if the execution of the enemy character pre-reading effect is continued until the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol determination executed with priority is a jackpot, based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination, In addition to not allowing the player to recognize that an effect that makes it easy to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot (for example, a reach effect that is always a big hit when it appears), the effect becomes complicated and makes the player uncomfortable. there is a possibility.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol determination executed with priority is a jackpot, at the start of the variation effect related to the second special symbol determination, or after the start of the variation effect You may employ | adopt the structure which complete | finishes execution of enemy character prefetching effect at the 1st end timing (for example, at the time of start of reach production). If the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect is also determined to be a jackpot advantageous for the player (that is, the jackpot symbol A or B), the first end during the variable effect related to the second special symbol determination The enemy character pre-reading effect may be continuously executed until a second end timing (for example, at the end of the changing effect) different from the timing. Thereby, what is called a reservation ream can be suggested by enemy character prefetching production.

  In addition, when the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol determination executed during the enemy character look-ahead effect is a loss, the configuration in the above-described other embodiment (before the 1 to 3 fluctuations during the enemy character look-ahead effect) The same control as the configuration in which the reach effect image related to the corresponding reach effect is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 may be performed.

[Variation of feasibility of enemy character prefetching]
In the following, referring to FIG. 23, even when the decorative symbol variation display mode is different from non-reach or reach lose according to the number of holdings at the time of executing the special symbol determination, it is possible to determine the start target of the enemy character pre-reading effect. An example will be described. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the feasibility of an enemy character prefetching effect in another embodiment. In the above embodiment, if it can be determined that the fluctuation pattern is 13.5 seconds or less based on the prior determination information, that is, if the reach random number is in the range of 0 to 84, the enemy character pre-reading effect is started. The case where it can be determined has been described (see FIGS. 10 and 13). In another embodiment, when it is not possible to determine based on prior determination information that the variation pattern that is actually used in the variation display of the special symbol is a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less, that is, the reach random number value is 85 to 94. Even within the range, the start target of the enemy character pre-reading effect may be determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to relatively reduce the rate at which enemy character look-ahead effects are controlled to be unexecutable, and to prevent the rate at which enemy character look-ahead effects are executed from becoming extremely low. Is possible.

  Note that reference numerals 541 to 543 in FIG. 23 correspond to the hold icons 541 to 543 described with reference to FIG. Further, when a hold corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect (corresponding to the hold icon 544 in FIG. 13 (B-1)) occurs, the loss is notified when the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. Shall. Moreover, all the determination results of the jackpot determination corresponding to 1 to 3 fluctuations of the prefetch target are all lost.

  As illustrated in FIG. 23, the variation pattern related to three pre-changes (corresponding to the hold icon 541 in FIG. 13 (B-1)) of the pre-read target of the enemy character pre-reading effect is a change pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. In some cases, the determination cannot be made based on the prior determination information. In this case, when it can be determined that the fluctuation pattern related to two fluctuations before and one fluctuation (corresponding to the hold icons 542 and 543) is a fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less, that is, to hold two fluctuations before and one fluctuation before There is a case where the variation display mode of the corresponding decorative design is non-reach. In such a case, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 can set an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario whose start target is one before three changes, two changes before, or one change. Then, when a scenario is set to start before 3 changes, if the actual change display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the start target is non-reach, the enemy character pre-reading effect starts based on the set scenario Is done. On the other hand, when the actual variation display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the start target is reach lose, the content related to the hold icon 544 is pre-read when the content of the change effect is determined after the start target of the enemy character pre-read effect. The scenario of the enemy character look-ahead effect determined as is not referred to (or the scenario is discarded). For this reason, the enemy character look-ahead effect based on the above scenario is not executed.

  Note that if the decorative display variation display mode before the second variation or the first variation is reach loss, the decorative display variation display mode before the third variation is non-reach. In the same manner as described with reference to (C), it is determined whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 23, it is not possible to determine based on the preliminary determination information that the variation pattern before the second variation of the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetching effect is a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. There is a case where the variation display mode of the decorative symbol before and one variation before is non-reach. In such a case, the sub CPU 131 can set an enemy character pre-reading effect scenario that starts two changes before and one change before. In the case where a scenario for starting before 2 changes is set, when the actual change display mode of the decorative design corresponding to the start target is non-reach, the enemy character pre-reading effect is started based on the scenario. On the other hand, when the actual variation display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the start target is reach lose, the scenario is not referred to when the content of the variation effect is determined after the start target of the enemy character pre-reading effect. For this reason, the enemy character look-ahead effect based on the above scenario is not executed. In addition, when a scenario is set to start before one change, the enemy character pre-reading effect is based on the scenario, regardless of whether or not the change display mode of the decorative pattern related to the two changes before is non-reach. Is started.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 23, the decoration related to one change before the change regardless of whether or not the change pattern related to the pre-change target of the enemy character pre-reading effect is a change pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. When the symbol variation display mode is reach lose, the enemy character pre-reading effect cannot be executed as in the case described with reference to FIG.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 23, regardless of whether or not the variation pattern before the third variation and the variation before the second variation of the enemy character prefetching effect is a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less, the enemy character. When it is not possible to determine based on the pre-determination information that the variation pattern related to one pre-change of the pre-reading target of the pre-reading effect is a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less, It can be set. When a scenario with a start target before one change is set, when the actual change display mode of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start target is non-reach, the enemy character pre-reading effect is started based on the scenario. On the other hand, when the actual variation display mode of the decorative pattern corresponding to the start target is reach lose, the scenario is not referred to when the content of the variation effect is determined after the start target of the enemy character look-ahead effect. Production is not executed.

[A jackpot game based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination]
Next, an example of a mode during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, with reference to FIG. 24 to FIG. 32, the jackpot game is based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination that is executed when the normal game state (low probability state and non-time-short state) is controlled. The case where is executed will be described. The jackpot game may be executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed during the probability variation game state (high probability state and short time state) or short time game state (low probability state and short time state). is there. In this case, an effect that is partially different from the effect described below may be performed (for example, the number of prize balls obtained by the player during the jackpot game is displayed), or the same effect is performed. It may be broken.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11, a jackpot game corresponding to any one of the jackpot symbols A to C is performed (FIG. 8 ( B)). During the jackpot game, a jackpot effect corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is executed. In the present embodiment, for example, a jackpot effect that suggests a gaming state and a performance mode immediately after the jackpot game is finished before the round game of a predetermined Rth (for example, the first R) is started as the jackpot effect. There is. Further, after a predetermined R-th round game (for example, the 10th R-th round game), there is a case where a jackpot effect that suggests the game state and the effect mode immediately after the jackpot game ends may be executed. In order to enhance the effect of such a big hit effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is devised in various ways.

[An example of the opening pattern of the big prize opening 13 and the V area 195]
First, with reference to FIG. 24, an example of the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and the V region 195 in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbols A to C will be described. For example, in the main ROM 102 of the game control board 100, a winning pattern 13 and an opening pattern of the V area 195 based on the type of jackpot symbol are predetermined. The opening pattern includes, for example, a maximum number of round games (Rmax) in one jackpot game, a specified number (Ymax) that is the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening 13 in one round game, and an “opening period” Are associated. In addition, the maximum number of times the big winning opening 13 is opened in each round game, whether or not the V area 195 is opened, and the maximum opening of the big winning opening 13 and the V area 195 for one opening of each round game. The period is associated. Further, the closing period of the special winning opening 13 and the V area 195, “interval period”, and “ending period” for one opening of each round game are associated with each other. The opening period is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the 1R round game in the jackpot game. The interval period is a period from when a closing condition (described later) is established in a round game until the next round game is started, and from when a closing condition is established in the last round game until an ending period is started Is the period. The ending period is a period from the end of the last round game to the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the opening pattern is uniquely determined according to the type of jackpot symbol, but this opening pattern has a common part regardless of the type of jackpot symbol and a part that differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the jackpot game based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the maximum number of round games (Rmax) in one jackpot game is set regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. It is predetermined at 11 times (see FIG. 24). For this reason, for example, even if the maximum number of round games is displayed on the round indicator 48, it is not possible to recognize the jackpot type. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game may be controlled in a probabilistic gaming state immediately after the jackpot game is finished, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 24, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol, the opening period is preset to 14 seconds, and the big winning opening 13 is opened with the same opening pattern in the 1st to 9th round games. . Specifically, in the round games of 1 to 9R, in each round game, a long open round game that long opens the big prize opening 13 is executed once (that is, the maximum number of open times in one round game is 1). Times). At the same time, the V region 195 is always kept closed. By controlling in this way, it is not possible to recognize the type of jackpot from the open mode of the big prize opening 13, so that the player can predict the gaming state (effect mode) immediately after the jackpot game ends, Can improve the interest of

  In addition, as a closing condition of the grand prize opening 13 in the round game with the maximum number of times of opening, the elapse of the maximum opening period (29.5 seconds in this embodiment) and the specified number of game balls with respect to the big prize opening 13 Two types of closing conditions are set in advance (9 in the present embodiment) and winning (see FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 13 is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the previously established closing condition of the two types of closing conditions. When the closing condition is established, the round game related to the establishment of the closing condition ends. Thereafter, when the next round game is started after a predetermined interval period has elapsed (for example, after 1 second has elapsed), the special winning opening 13 is controlled to be openable again.

  In the present embodiment, in the 10R and 11R round games, the big prize opening 13 and the V region 195 are opened with different opening patterns based on the types of jackpot symbols.

  Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 24, in the case of the jackpot symbol A, in the 10R round game, a long open round game in which the big winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are long open is executed once. When the interval period (1 second in this embodiment) provided immediately after the 10R round game ends, the 11R round game is started. In the case of the jackpot symbol A, in the 11R round game, a short open round game in which the big winning opening 13 is opened short is executed once. Note that the V region 195 is kept closed after the 10R round game is completed. In the case of jackpot symbol A, an interval period of 1 second is provided in advance immediately after the 11th round game is completed. In the present embodiment, the last round game in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A to C is the 11R round game, and the ending period is preset to 10 seconds regardless of the type of jackpot symbol.

  In the case of the jackpot symbol B, the maximum number of times the big prize opening 13 is opened in the round game of the 10R is 2, and the big prize opening 13 and the V area 195 are closed after being short-opened. ”(1 second in this embodiment) is released after elapse. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 24, the maximum opening period in which the big prize opening 13 and the V region 195 are maintained in the open state is set to 0.2 seconds for the first short opening. The second time, which is long open, is preset to 29 seconds.

  In addition, when the maximum number of times the big winning opening 13 is opened in one round game is two times or more, the round game is ended based on the closing condition established first among the following two closing conditions. One of the closing conditions is that the last maximum opening period has elapsed (for example, in the case of jackpot symbol B, 29 seconds, which is the second maximum opening period in the 10R round game, has elapsed). Another closing condition is that a predetermined number (9 in the present embodiment) of game balls wins the big winning opening 13 during one round game.

  In the case of jackpot symbol B, as illustrated in FIG. 24, an interval period (1 second in the present embodiment) is provided immediately after the 10R round game ends. That is, when the round game of the 10R is performed, the special winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are changed twice between the open state and the closed state. For this reason, the interval period immediately after the end of the 10th round game is the “second closing period” for the special winning opening 13 and the V region 195. When the interval period elapses, the 11R round game is started. In the case of the jackpot symbol B, in the 11R round game, a short open round game in which the big winning opening 13 is short opened is executed once. Note that the V region 195 is kept closed after the 10R round game is completed. In the case of the jackpot symbol B, immediately after the end of the 11R round game, an interval period of 8 seconds is provided in advance as a period until the ending period starts.

  In the case of the jackpot symbol C, as illustrated in FIG. 24, in the 10R round game, a short open round game in which the big winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are short opened is executed once. When the interval period (1 second in this embodiment) provided immediately after the 10R round game ends, the 11R round game is started. In the case of the jackpot symbol C, in the 11R round game, a long open round game in which the big winning opening 13 is long opened is executed once. Note that the V region 195 is kept closed after the 10R round game is completed. In the case of the jackpot symbol C, an interval period of 1 second is provided in advance as a period until the ending period starts immediately after the end of the 11R round game.

  In this embodiment, the release pattern until the end of the 9R round game is the same regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. In the case of a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A after the 9R round game ends, for example, immediately after the big prize opening 13 is opened for 29.5 seconds (10R round game), it is closed for 1 second. From (interval period), it is released for a short period of 0.2 seconds (the 11R round game). On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, for example, immediately after the big winning opening 13 is briefly opened for 0.2 seconds (10R round game), after being closed for 1 second (10R (Round game of eye), 29 seconds are released for a long time (round game of 10R). In the case of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, immediately after the winning prize opening 13 is briefly opened for 0.2 seconds (10R round game), it is closed for 1 second (interval period) and is opened for 29.5 seconds. (The 11th round game).

  By controlling in this way, when the big winning opening 13 is opened for 29 seconds immediately after the end of the round game of the 9R, the big winning game corresponding to the big hit symbol A is executed from the opened state of the big winning opening 13. It is possible to recognize this. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to control the game in the probability variation game state immediately after the jackpot game is finished (probability variation mode as the effect mode), and to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, if the winning prize opening 13 is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds immediately after the end of the 9th round game, it is determined whether the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B or the jackpot symbol C is being executed. Can not. Specifically, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 corresponding to the jackpot symbol C and the opening pattern of the big winning slot 13 until the 11R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is started, Are very similar. The first release period (0.2 seconds) in the 10R round game corresponding to jackpot symbol B is the same as the release period (0.2 seconds) in the 10R round game corresponding to jackpot symbol C. is there. The first closing period in the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and the interval period immediately after the end of the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C are both set in advance to 1 second. Also, the second release period (29 seconds) in the 10R round game corresponding to jackpot symbol B is very similar to the release period (29.5 seconds) in the 11R round game corresponding to jackpot symbol C. Yes. By controlling in this way, it is not possible to recognize up to the type of jackpot (big jackpot symbol B or C) from the open mode of the jackpot 13. For this reason, the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol C, and it is possible to make the player feel anxious about whether the gaming state immediately after the jackpot game is a short-time gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the V region 195 is open for a long time during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbols A and B, so it is easy to win a V. When the V prize is won, the probability change gaming state (high probability state and short time) immediately after the jackpot game ends. The game is controlled by (state). Here, the V region 195 is provided so as to be visible to the player. For this reason, some players who have recognized that when a game ball passes through the V region 195, the game is controlled in the probability change game state immediately after the jackpot game is finished, some players who are early in the probability change game state immediately after the jackpot game end. It is possible to recognize that is controlled. For this reason, some players can enjoy the effects during the jackpot game while feeling superiority after winning the V prize. On the other hand, a player who missed the V prize, and a player who does not recognize the jackpot type even if the game ball passes through the V area 195, sees the effects and the like performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal screen 5. Try to recognize the type of jackpot.

  In another embodiment, the maximum number of times the big winning opening 13 and the V area 195 are opened in the 10R round game may be different in correspondence with the jackpot symbol B. As an example, the maximum number of times that the special winning opening 13 is opened may be two, and the maximum number of times that the V area 195 is opened may be one. Specifically, in the case where the grand prize opening 13 is closed for 1 second after a short opening for 0.2 seconds as in FIG. 24 and then opened for a long time for 29 seconds, the V region 195 is defined as the short opening of the big winning opening 13. It may be opened at the same time and may be opened for 29.5 seconds as it is.

  The opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the V region 195 illustrated in FIG. 24 is merely an example, and any opening pattern may be used. For example, the maximum number of round games (Rmax) may be different for each jackpot symbol, and the interval period of each round game may be set to any value. Further, for example, the second release period in the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and the release period in the 11R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C may be the same (for example, 29.5 seconds).

[Example of production during the jackpot]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 32, the jackpot effect, which is an effect executed during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbols A to C, will be described. In this embodiment, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined as one of the jackpot symbols A to C. The jackpot effect may be any effect, but the type of jackpot symbol (that is, the type of jackpot) is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is a set of seven symbols, and among the jackpot symbols A to C The final stop symbol is an effect different from the case where the final stop symbol is other than the 7 symbol set.

[Direction during jackpot game corresponding to jackpot symbol A and seven symbol set]
First, with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, the jackpot effect for 7 symbol matching will be described. Here, FIG. 25 is a time chart illustrating the flow of effects in the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is a set of seven symbols. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the effect during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is a set of seven symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the big winning of 7 symbols based on winning at the first starting port 11 means that the winning ball is easy to win V, in which 10R worth of winning balls are obtained. Further, on the condition of winning V, it means that the game is a big hit that shifts to the probability change game state (high probability state and short time state; probability change mode as the production mode) immediately after the jackpot game ends.

  When the decorative symbols are arranged in a total of 7 symbols and stopped for a predetermined symbol fixed time (for example, 1 second), the variation effect ends and the jackpot game is started. In this jackpot game, first, a 7-pattern matching jackpot title image suggesting the type of jackpot is displayed during the opening period, and then an “opening effect right-handed image” (not shown) that prompts the player to hit the right Is displayed. The jackpot title image for 7 symbol matching is an effect image showing a jackpot title such as “RUSH BONUS” (see FIG. 26A), the type of jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol A, and the final stop symbol is 7 symbols. It is the effect image displayed only when it is in alignment. The opening effect right-handed image is an effect image showing a word such as “right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow. In the present embodiment, the same effect image is displayed regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. The player can recognize that the current jackpot is a jackpot that is easy to win V in which a prize ball equivalent to 10R is obtained by looking at the jackpot title image for 7 symbols.

  When the opening period ends and the 1R round game is started, for example, until the predetermined timing (for example, after 0.1 second elapses) after the 10R round game starts, an effect during the round for 7 symbols is performed. The 7-pattern matching round effect is an effect that suggests that it is easy to win a V prize, for example, an effect that one of the ally characters (attacking character C) recalls the past (FIG. 26B). And (C)). Specifically, this is an effect of reminiscing about the days when the attacking character C had spent with the rare friend T, the best friend, and the first encounter with other friendly characters (attacking characters D and E). The rare character T is a character that appears only during the fluctuating effect corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol determination in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and is a character having a relatively low appearance rate compared to other characters. . The player is highly likely to enjoy the game while feeling the joy of seeing the production of the rare character T and the satisfaction of winning the V-winning jackpot.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the grand prize opening 13 and the V area 195 are opened for a long time from the start of the 10R round game, the game ball to the V area 195 (large prize opening 13). The first probability change notification effect that prompts the player to launch is started (see FIG. 26D). The first probability change notification effect is an effect performed using, for example, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, and a light emitting element such as the frame lamp 37, and is an effect that notifies that the V region 195 is long open. . As an example, a message “Aim for V!” And an arrow image indicating the vicinity of the special winning opening 13 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and a line of friendly characters such as “Aim” is output. In addition, the light emitting element in the vicinity of the big prize opening 13 in the frame lamp 37 or the like has a light emission pattern unique to the first probability change notification effect that emphasizes the big prize opening 13 around the light emitting elements arranged in the vicinity of the big prize opening 13. Emits light.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the big winning of 7 symbols is achieved based on the winning at the first starting port 11 (that is, the big winning symbol A and 7 symbols are aligned), the player is the big winner that the V region 195 is opened long. It is likely that they are aware of it. For this reason, the execution time of the first probability change notification effect is set to be relatively short compared to other effects (for example, the 7 symbol matching round effect, the second probability change notification effect) (see FIG. 25).

  After the V area 195 is opened for a long time by the start of the round game of the 10R, when the first game ball passing through the V area 195 is detected by the V winning opening switch 116, the timing ( At the first execution timing, the second probability change notification effect is immediately started. The second probability change notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game is controlled in the probability change game state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the probability change mode as the effect mode). The second probability change notification effect is an effect performed using, for example, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, and a light emitting element such as the frame lamp 37. For example, a V winning sound (for example, “Cuen”), which is an effect sound that is output only in the second probability change notification effect, is output from the speaker 24 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and a V winning indicating the letter “V” is displayed. A notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 26E). Further, light emitting elements such as the frame lamp 37 emit light with a light emission pattern (for example, rainbow-colored flashing light emission) unique to the second probability change notification effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 25, the second probability change notification effect is continuously executed until the 11R round game starts. An ending effect (hereinafter also referred to as “probability change ending effect”) for notifying the transition to the probability change game state is performed from the start of the 11R round game to the end of a predetermined ending period. The probability change transition ending effect is an effect for notifying that the effect mode after the jackpot game is the probability change mode. In the probable transition ending effect, for example, three friendly characters (other people may be superposed) on an orange background image, and the name of the effect mode (for example, “RUSH”) collectively representing the probabilistic mode and the short-time mode. The effect image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 26F). In addition, a message for calling attention to forgetting to take a prepaid card and theft (hereinafter referred to as “warning image”) is displayed. The ally character displayed during the probabilistic transition ending effect may be the same as or different from the ally character appearing in the background with the battlefield image (background image in the probabilistic mode) immediately after the probable transition ending effect. May be.

  If the V winning is not won during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the first probability change notification effect is performed until a predetermined execution end timing (for example, the closing timing of the V area 195). Then, an ending effect (hereinafter also referred to as a “short-time transition ending effect”) for notifying the transition to the short-time gaming state is performed from the start of the 11R round game to the end of a predetermined ending period. The short-time transition ending effect is an effect for notifying that the effect mode after the jackpot game is the time-saving mode. In the present embodiment, the time-shift transition ending and the probability variation transition ending effect are effects in the same manner except that the background images are different (see FIGS. 26F and 26G). For this reason, the player can recognize which ending effect of the short-time transition ending effect and the probability change transition ending effect is being performed based on the type of the background image. Specifically, for example, in the short-time transition ending effect, for example, the same ally character as the friend character displayed in the probability transition ending effect is displayed superimposed on the green background image. Further, similarly to the probability change transition ending effect, an effect image indicating the name of the effect mode (for example, “RUSH”) that collectively refers to the probability change mode and the time reduction mode, and a warning image are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which music (that is, effect sound) that has been output from the speaker 24 before the 11R round game starts is output immediately after the end of the jackpot. During the probable transition ending production (and during the short-time transition ending production), the volume is relatively small compared to the volume (for example, volume 100%) in which the production sound is output during the round production and the fluctuation production immediately after the end of the jackpot game. A production sound is output at a volume (for example, volume 30%). As a result, even if the same music is output, it is possible to add an impact depending on the production.

  In the present embodiment, the same execution time (11.2 seconds in the present embodiment) is the case where the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is 7 symbols, and the jackpot symbol A and other symbols are aligned. ), The same effect (probability transition ending effect or short-time transition ending effect) is executed (see FIGS. 25, 24, and 27A).

  It should be noted that the short-time transition ending and the probability variation transition ending effect may be different in at least one of, for example, the type of the friend character, the background image, and the name of the effect mode at the transition destination.

  Further, in another embodiment, during the probability transition ending effect and during the short-time transition ending effect, an effect image (for example, rare character T) that is different from the normal display is displayed, so that the special symbol determination hold may be a big hit. You may suggest that there is.

[Direction during jackpot game corresponding to other patterns other than jackpot symbols A to C and seven symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot design for the other symbol matching corresponding to the other symbol matching that the jackpot symbol is any of the jackpot symbols A to C and the final stop symbol is other than the seven symbol matching. explain. FIG. 27 is a time chart illustrating the flow of effects in the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is one of the jackpot symbols A to C and the final stop symbol is other than the seven symbol matching. Note that an example of a specific effect mode of the jackpot effect described with reference to FIG. 27 will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32.

  If the jackpot symbol is one of the jackpot symbols A to C and the final stop symbol is other than the 7 symbol set (for example, 1 symbol set), the type of jackpot until the 7th round game starts The production is difficult to distinguish. Specifically, for example, during the opening period, the same other symbol matching opening effect is executed regardless of the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the same manner regardless of the type of jackpot symbol, an enemy character appearance image 57 (see FIG. 30A) in which an enemy character appears, a jackpot title image for other symbol matching (not shown), and a player An opening effect right-handed image (not shown) that prompts right-handing is displayed over time. For example, the enemy character appearance image 57, the jackpot title image for matching other symbols, and the right-handed image for opening effect are displayed relatively large using almost all areas of the liquid crystal screen 5, respectively.

  Here, the jackpot title image for matching other symbols is an effect image showing a jackpot title such as “BATTLE BONUS”, and the same effect image is displayed regardless of any of the jackpot symbols A to C. . The opening effect right-handed image is the same effect image as the opening effect right-handed image displayed during the 7-pattern uniform opening effect, and is an effect image showing a word such as “right-handed” and a right-pointing arrow. The enemy character indicated by the enemy character appearance image 57 is the same character as the enemy character appearing during the variation effect (may be an enemy character stronger than the enemy character appearing during the variation effect).

  In addition, during the opening effect for matching other symbols, the same effect sound is output from the speaker 24 regardless of the jackpot symbol A to C. For example, a song that is different from that during the opening of the 7-pattern uniform and a line of characters of a teammate character indicating a big hit title such as “Battle Bonus!” Are output in a manner synchronized with the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. In addition, at least among the production sounds during the opening effect for the other symbols, the lines such as “Turn right” that prompts the player to make a right strike are the same as those produced in the opening effect for the seven symbols It is.

  Further, during the round of the other symbols is executed from the start of the 1R round game to the start of the 7R round game. The effect during the round for other symbol matching is an effect in which the enemy character and the ally character that appeared in the opening effect for other symbol matching continue the battle.

  The winning or losing of the battle during the performance during the round for other symbols is informed by the judgment performance performed from the start of the round game of the 7th round. When the ally character wins in battle, the V area 195 is easily released at the 10th rate at the rate of 100%, and when winning V, the game is controlled in the probable gaming state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the promising mode is probable) Mode). On the other hand, if the ally character loses, the possibility that the V region 195 will be opened shortly more difficult to win than the possibility that the V region 195 will be easily released long in 10R (that is, corresponding to the jackpot symbol B) (that is, the jackpot symbol). (Corresponding to C) is larger by a factor of 5 (see FIG. 8B). For this reason, if the ally character loses, the V prize cannot be won during the jackpot game, and the game is easily controlled in the short-time game state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the production mode is easily shifted to the short-time mode).

  Here, the effect during the round for other symbol matching is an effect that can be performed via a plurality of effect routes. If the production route is different, there are some differences such as the number of attacks that the ally character applies to the enemy character and the number of ally characters that appear. For example, a production route with a large number of attacks that an ally character applies to an enemy character and a production route with a large number of ally characters appearing are production routes with high expectation that the teammate character will win. The effect during the round for other symbol matching that the teammate character has a high expectation of winning suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that the V region 195 is a jackpot (that is, jackpot symbol A) that is easily opened for a long time. On the other hand, the production route in which the number of teammate characters attacking the enemy character is small, and the production route in which the number of teammate characters appearing are small are production routes in which the risk of losing the teammate character is high. The effect during the round of other symbols with a high risk of losing the teammate character suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that the V region 195 is a big hit (ie, a big hit symbol C) that is short-opened with difficulty in winning a prize.

  It is dependent on the type of jackpot (for example, whether the V region 195 is a jackpot that is easily opened for a long time or not) whether the stage during which the other symbol matching round is easily performed is performed. However, regardless of which of the jackpot symbols A to C is performed, the basic scenario of how the teammate character and the enemy character develop the battle is the same. For this reason, it is relatively likely that the player has difficulty identifying the type of jackpot during the production during the round for other symbols. The specific effect route of the effect during the round for other symbol matching will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Then, with the start of the round game of the 7R, a judgment effect for notifying the winning or losing of the battle performed in the effect during the round for other symbol matching is performed. The judgment effect is one of the big hits and middle effects that pay attention to whether or not it is a big hit advantageous to the player (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). For example, whether or not the V region 195 is opened for a long time. Is an effect that suggests to the player. The judgment effect is composed of a “judge button effect” that is one of the button effects that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26, and a “result notification effect (victory notification or defeat notification)” that notifies the winner of the battle. The For example, in order to increase the expectation for a jackpot advantageous for the player (for example, jackpot symbol A), the judge button effect is based on the type of jackpot, and the modes of button effects A to D described with reference to FIG. It is executed by either. For example, the state of the effect button 26 indicated by the effect button image 51 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (normal state or projecting state), and the effect object 71 is in the advanced position. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the performance button 26 is controlled to be in the protruding state.

  During the judge button effect, a predetermined valid period (for example, 4 seconds from the start of the transition button effect) in which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective is set. When the player operates the effect button 26 within this effective period, a result notification effect is started in accordance with the operation (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). For example, if a judge button effect (modes B to D) in which the effect button 26 is in a protruding state appears, the player will win the teammate character (that is, the V region 195 is easily opened for a long time). There is a possibility of operation with expectation. In addition, for example, when a judge button effect (aspect A) in which the effect button 26 is in the normal state appears, the player may lose the teammate character (that is, the V area 195 may be short-opened with difficulty in winning a prize). There is a possibility to operate while feeling anxious. If the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the effective period, the result notification effect is started at a predetermined effective period end timing (for example, 4 seconds from the start of the judge button effect).

  The result notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning or losing of the battle performed during the effect during the round for other symbol matching, and is an effect associated with the type of jackpot symbol. Specifically, for example, in response to the jackpot symbol A, a “result notification effect (victory notification)” in which the ally character wins the enemy character is performed. In addition, a “result notification effect (defeat notification)” in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character corresponding to the jackpot symbols B and C is performed. Hereinafter, the flow of effects after the result notification effect will be described for each jackpot type with reference to FIG.

(Flow of production after result notification production corresponding to jackpot symbol A)
As illustrated in FIG. 27A, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, when the judge button effect ends, a result notification effect (win notification) is performed. In the result notification effect (victory notification), for example, a message notifying that the teammate character has won and a message suggesting that the V region 195 is easily opened for V winning are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 ( For example, “Victory” and “V Challenge GET!” Messages). When the result notification effect (victory notification) is performed, the player is more likely to enjoy the subsequent game while having a sense of excitement while being convinced of the transition to the probability change game state (the probability change mode as the effect mode). As described above, the result notification effect (win notification) is an effect for notifying that the player is a jackpot advantageous to the player. In addition, the result notification effect (win notification) is an effect of notifying that the V winning is easy, and that when the V winning is achieved, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability changing gaming state (the probability changing mode as the effect mode). is there.

When the 9R round game is started, the result notification effect (win notification) ends.
In the present embodiment, the first probability change notification effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball in the V area 195 (large winning opening 13) from the start of the round game of the 9R until the V prize is won during the round game of the 10R. Done. The first probability change notification effect is an effect performed using, for example, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, and a light emitting element such as a frame lamp 37, causing the player to pay attention to the big prize opening 13, This is an effect of notifying that the V region 195 is long open.

  Here, the first probability change notification effect corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is A and the symbols other than the seven symbols are aligned is the first probability variation corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is A and the final stop symbol is the seven symbols. It is set in advance so that the execution time is longer than the notification effect (see FIGS. 25 and 27A). When the jackpot symbol is A and the other symbols are aligned, the first probability change notification effect is performed via a judge effect or the like that expects whether or not the V region 195 is long open. For this reason, in order to sufficiently enhance the satisfaction with the V region 195 being opened long, the first probability change performed when there is a high possibility of recognizing that the V region 195 is a big hit with long opening. The execution time is set in advance to be longer than the notification effect. In other embodiments, it is set in advance so that there is no difference in the execution time of the first probability change notification effect between the jackpot symbol A and the other symbol set and the jackpot symbol A and the seven symbol set. Also good.

  For example, in the first probability change notification effect, a message “Aim for V in the next round!” And an arrow image indicating the vicinity of the winning prize opening 13 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as the 9R round game is started. Is done. In addition, a speech of an ally character such as “Aim for V in the next round” is output from the speaker 24. In addition, a light emitting element such as the frame lamp 37 emits light with a light emission pattern unique to the first probability change notification effect in which light is emitted centering on the light emitting element disposed in the vicinity of the special winning opening 13. At the timing corresponding to the opening of the big winning opening 13 and the V area 195 so that the game ball can be easily won by the 10R round game being started (for example, when 0.1 second has elapsed from the start of opening), the liquid crystal The message displayed on the screen 5 is changed to a message such as “Aim for V!” And a word of a friendly character such as “Aim” is output. When the 10R round game is started, the V area 195 is opened long, so that the player can easily make a V prize.

  When the first probability change notification effect ends according to the V prize, the second probability change notification effect is started. The second probability change notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game is controlled in the probability change game state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the probability change mode as the effect mode). The second probability change notification effect is an effect performed using, for example, the liquid crystal screen 5, the speaker 24, and a light emitting element such as the frame lamp 37. For example, it is executed in the same effect mode as the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is a set of seven symbols. For example, a V winning sound that is an effect sound output only in the second certainty change notification effect is output for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and a V winning notification image indicating a letter “V” is displayed (for example, FIG. 30 (I)). Further, light emitting elements such as the frame lamp 37 emit light with a light emission pattern (for example, rainbow-colored flashing light emission) unique to the second probability change notification effect.

  In the present embodiment, the second probability change notification effect may be started at the first execution timing, the second timing, or the third execution timing. The first execution timing and the second execution timing are the start timing of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A. The third execution timing is the start timing of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B. Specifically, the first execution timing is a timing at which the second certainty change notification effect is immediately executed according to the first V winning after the 10R round game in which V winning is easy is started. Further, the second execution timing is to execute the second probability change notification effect when a V prize has already been won at a predetermined timing during the 10R round game (for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 10R round game). It is timing. The third execution timing is the second probability change notification at a predetermined timing during the round game that is started after the V-winning during the 10R round game (at the start of the 11R round game in this embodiment). This is the timing for performing the production.

  The start timing of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, after the V area 195 is released, when the first game ball passing through the V area 195 is detected by the V winning opening switch 116, a V winning notification command for notifying the V winning is a game control. It is set in the main RAM 103 of the substrate 100 (see FIG. 42). Then, within one interrupt process (for example, 4 milliseconds) after the V winning notification command is set, the V winning notification command is transmitted from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 33). In the case of a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 instructs execution of the second probability change notification effect within one interrupt process (for example, 4 milliseconds) after receiving the V winning notification command. The second probability change notification effect setting command to be transmitted is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 (see FIGS. 44, 51, and 53). If the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 is in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the first execution within one interrupt process (for example, 4 milliseconds) after receiving the second probability change notification effect setting command is received. The second probability change notification effect is executed at the timing (see FIGS. 55 and 56).

  Here, for example, if an abnormality occurs in the transmission / reception of the command, there is a possibility that even if the V winning notification command is received, the second probability change notification effect setting command may not be transmitted by the sub CPU 131. Further, as a result of a plurality of commands being transmitted / received in a state where an abnormality has occurred in the transmission / reception of the command, there is a possibility that the second certainty change notification effect may be executed even though the V prize is not originally received. . When such an abnormality occurs, the second probability change notification effect may not be executed in response to the passage of the first game ball through the V region 195. Then, for example, when the transmission / reception of the command is normal, the second probability change notification effect is performed at the second execution timing (for example, after 4 seconds from the start of the 10R round game) on the condition that the V prize has already been won. May be executed. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem that the second certainty change notification effect is unintentionally executed even though the game is not controlled in the certainty gaming state immediately after the jackpot game ends. It is.

  In addition, when the second probability change notification effect is executed at the second execution timing, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of time for winning V while securing the execution time of the first probability change notification effect (FIG. 27 ( A)). For example, in the present embodiment, the first probability change notification effect is executed during the period from the start of the 9R round game to the V-winning during the 10R round game. For example, an effect image displayed during the first probability change notification effect (for example, an image showing a rare appearance of an ally character), or an effect sound output from the speaker 24 (for example, an ally character that prompts the player to launch a game ball) Some players who want to enjoy (sound) slowly may not launch a game ball aiming at the V region 195 even if the 10R round game is started. Thereafter, when it is attempted to launch a game ball aiming at the V area 195, for example, a trouble occurs in the handle 20, so that it takes time until the game ball is launched, and as a result, a situation where a V prize cannot be achieved occurs. there is a possibility. When the second certainty change notification effect is executed at the second execution timing, it is possible to make a V prize while effectively enhancing the effect of the first certainty change notification effect while preventing such a situation.

  As illustrated in FIG. 27A, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the second probability change notification effect is continuously executed until the 11R round game starts. An ending effect (hereinafter also referred to as “probability change ending effect”) for notifying the transition to the probability change game state is performed from the start of the 11R round game to the end of a predetermined ending period. In the present embodiment, the same probability transition ending effect is performed when the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is 7 symbols aligned and when the other symbols are aligned. Specifically, for example, three friendly characters (other people are allowed) are superimposed on an orange background image, and the name of the effect mode (for example, “RUSH”) that collectively represents the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. An effect image and a warning image are displayed.

  In this embodiment, the execution time of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is 11.2 seconds (see FIG. 24), and is set in advance longer than the execution time of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and C. (See FIGS. 27A to 27C).

  Although not illustrated in the figure, if the V winning is not won during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the first probability change notification effect is a predetermined execution end timing (for example, closing of the V area 195). Timing). Then, an ending effect (hereinafter also referred to as a “short-time transition ending effect”) for notifying the transition to the short-time gaming state is performed from the start of the 11R round game to the end of a predetermined ending period. In the present embodiment, the same short-time transition ending effect is performed in the case where the jackpot symbol is A and the final stop symbol is 7 symbols aligned and in the case where the other symbols are aligned. For example, the same ally character as the ally character displayed in the probability transition ending effect is displayed superimposed on the green background image. In addition, an effect image indicating the name of the effect mode (for example, “RUSH”) that collectively represents the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, and a warning image are displayed.

(Flow of production after result notification production corresponding to jackpot symbol B)
As exemplified in FIG. 27 (B), in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, when the judge button effect ends, a result notification effect (defeat notification) for notifying that the teammate character has been defeated is performed. The result notification effect (defeat notification) is executed until the 9R round game starts. The result notification effect (defeat notification) is an effect suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility that the game state immediately after the jackpot game is ended is controlled to the short-time game state (the short-time mode as the effect mode). In addition, this is an effect suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility that the V region 195 is short-opened so that the game ball is difficult to win.

  The result notification effect (defeat notification) is executed in exactly the same effect mode corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol B and the case where the jackpot symbol is C. Specifically, the message “defeat” is displayed in the same manner for any of the jackpot symbols B and C, or an effect image in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed. For this reason, even if the player sees the result notification effect (defeat notification), the player cannot distinguish which of the jackpot symbols B and C corresponds to the jackpot. Here, in this embodiment, when the ally character loses, the V region 195 may be short-opened more difficult to win than the possibility that the V region 195 is easily opened long (that is, corresponding to the jackpot symbol B). (Corresponding to C) is five times larger (see FIG. 8B). For this reason, when the result notification effect (defeat notification) is executed, the player can easily assume that the V area 195 is opened shortly so that it is difficult to win a prize (that is, shift to the short-time gaming state (short-time mode)).

  In this way, when the result notification effect (defeat notification) is performed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility of being a jackpot that is not very advantageous to the player (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state; jackpot symbol C). . In addition, when a result notification effect (defeat notification) is performed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the V region 195 is short-opened so that it is difficult for a game ball to win.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if a result notification effect (defeat notification) is performed, the V region 195 may be opened for a long time, so that the player can change to the probability change gaming state (the probability change mode as the effect mode). You can enjoy the game without losing expectations. In the present embodiment, the result notification effect (defeat notification) is continuously executed until the 9R round game is started.

  When the 9R round game is started, the result notification effect (defeat notification) ends, and the character introduction effect that introduces the enemy character and the friend character is started. The character introduction effect is executed from the start of the 9R round game to the start of the 11R round game. The character introduction effect, like the result notification effect (defeat notification), suggests that the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is relatively likely to be controlled to the short-time game state (the short-time mode as the effect mode). Production. In addition, this is an effect suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility that the V region 195 is short-opened so that the game ball is difficult to win.

  In the case where the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol B and the case where the jackpot symbol C is the jackpot symbol C, the effect mode during the character introduction effect is almost the same. Specifically, the same character introduction image and the same introduction sentence image are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 regardless of which of the jackpot symbols B and C (see, for example, FIG. 31E). For example, the character introduction image is an effect image indicating a character (for example, an enemy character), and the introduction sentence image is an effect image including an introduction sentence of the character indicated by the character introduction image.

  In the present embodiment, when the character introduction effect is performed, the possibility that the V region 195 is short-opened more difficult to win (that is, the jackpot symbol C) than the possibility that the V region 195 is easily opened for a long time (that is, corresponding to the jackpot symbol B). (Corresponding to 1) is larger by a factor of 5 (see FIG. 8B). For this reason, when the character introduction effect is performed, it is easy for the player to assume that the V region 195 is opened shortly so that it is difficult to win a prize (that is, shift to the short-time gaming state (short-time mode)).

  In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, in the round game of the 10R that is started during the character introduction production, it is easy to make a V prize after the big winning opening 13 and the V area 195 are briefly opened for 0.2 seconds. For 29 seconds (see FIGS. 27B and 24).

  Here, in the present embodiment, a “round image” is displayed that specifically indicates how many long open round games in the jackpot game the long open round game is. For example, a round image indicating a specific number such as “ROUND9” is displayed during the 9R round game corresponding to the 9th long open round game. However, when a long open round game is performed after a round game composed only of short open round games, the round image in the long open round game after the short open round game displays a number different from the actual number of rounds. turn into. In order to prevent such a problem, a round image indicating a specific number is deleted after the start of a round game composed of only short-open round games. For example, in response to the jackpot symbol C, only the short opening round game in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened for 0.2 seconds is performed as the 10R round game, and the grand prize opening 13 is set for 29.5 seconds as the 11R round game. Only long open round games that open. For this reason, the round image is deleted when the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C is started.

  On the premise of this configuration, in this embodiment, it is made impossible to know at the start of the 10R round game which of the jackpot symbols B and C corresponds to the jackpot. Specifically, in the round game of the 10R corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, after the short opening round game (opening for the first time) that opens the big winning opening 13 for 0.2 seconds is performed, A long open round game (second open) is performed for 29 seconds (see FIG. 24). The 10R round opening game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B (first opening) is regarded as the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, and the round image is displayed when the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is started. I decided to erase it. Therefore, a round image indicating a specific number such as “ROUND10” is not displayed at the start of the 10R round game, regardless of which of the jackpot symbols B and C is supported. Thereby, even if the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the player can be mistaken for the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C.

  Note that, unlike the jackpot symbol A, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 that the V region 195 is opened for a long time, and the effect output from the speaker 24 Not suggested by sound. For example, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the first probability change notification effect is not executed. For this reason, the player is less likely to have a consciousness of launching a game ball because the V region 195 is long open. There is a high possibility that a game ball will be launched by misunderstanding. Even in such a case, in the present embodiment, since the V region 195 is provided inside the big winning opening 13, the player can easily make a game as long as the winning ball 13 is won. It is possible to win V.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a round image such as “ROUND10” is displayed in response to the V winning when the V winning is made during the character introduction effect (see FIG. 31H). On the other hand, the round image is not displayed when no V prize is awarded during the character introduction effect. That is, when the erased round image is displayed again and the current number of rounds is notified, it is suggested that the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is the probability variation gaming state (probability variation mode as the effect mode).

  Also, unlike the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B does not immediately start the second probability change notification effect in response to the first V winning, and the subsequent timing (in the present embodiment, the following) At the start of the round game), the second probability change notification effect is started. For this reason, it is highly likely that many players will not notice that they have won the V prize even if they have won the V prize. That is, there is a high possibility that the game will continue while recognizing that a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C in which the V region 195 is short-opened is executed so that the game ball is difficult to win.

  Thereafter, when the third execution timing, which is the start time of the 11R round game, arrives, if the V prize is won during the 10R round game, the character introduction image and the introductory sentence image related to the character introduction effect are torn by the ally character. Production is performed. Immediately thereafter, the second probability change notification effect is executed (see FIG. 27B). Thereby, the player can recognize that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the probability variation mode as the effect mode). For example, a player who misunderstood that the jackpot game is in the short-time mode (that is, the jackpot corresponding to jackpot symbol C) is delighted to know the unexpected fact that the jackpot game will shift to the probability change mode after the jackpot game ends. There is a high possibility of doing.

  Since the 11R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is a round game composed only of short open round games, no round image is displayed. Except for the presence or absence of the display of the round image, the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A are executed in the same effect mode. For example, the same V winning sound or a V winning notification image is displayed as in the second probability change notification effect during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A. As illustrated in FIG. 27B, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the second probability change notification effect continues from the start of the 11R short-open round game to the start of a predetermined ending period. And executed.

  When the ending period arrives, the probability transition ending effect is performed until the end of a predetermined ending period. In the present embodiment, the probability variation transition ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and the probability variation transition ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A have the same rendering mode except that the execution time is different. Specifically, the execution time of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is 10 seconds (see FIG. 24), and is set in advance shorter than the execution time of the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (that is, 11.2 seconds). (See FIGS. 27B and 27A). For example, in the same way as the probability change transition ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the effect mode is a generic term for the three friendly characters (may be other numbers) superimposed on the orange background image, and the probability change mode and the short time mode. An effect image indicating a name (for example, “RUSH”) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 26F).

  Here, the execution time of the second probability variation notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A and the execution time of the second probability variation notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B will be specifically described. In the present embodiment, the second probability change notification effect is executed over different periods according to the type of jackpot (that is, jackpot symbol A or B). Even in such a configuration, the execution time is variable (corresponding to jackpot symbol A) by providing the length of the interval period, which is a fixed time, in advance, and the execution time is constant (jackpot) In the case of corresponding to the design B), it is possible to make the execution time of the second probability variation notification effect the same to some extent.

  Specifically, the maximum opening period of the big winning opening 13 in the 11R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is 0.2 seconds, from the time when the closing condition of the 11R round game is established until the end of the ending period. The interval period is preset to 8 seconds (see FIG. 27B and FIG. 24). The eleventh round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is a short-opening round game in which the opening period of the big winning opening 13 is relatively short, and basically no game ball wins the big winning opening 13. For this reason, it is difficult to assume that the 11R round game will end due to the closing condition that a specified number (9 in this embodiment) of game balls have won the big winning opening 13 and the maximum open period (for example, 0) .2 seconds) is considered to end when the closing condition is satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the execution time of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is constant (8.2 seconds in the present embodiment).

  In contrast, the execution time of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A changes according to the closing condition establishment timing in the 10R round game (see FIGS. 27A and 24). Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the player keeps hitting the game ball normally aiming at the big prize opening 13, a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls will be created from the start of the long open round game. It takes 7 to 8 seconds on average until the round game is completed due to the closing condition of winning. For this reason, the execution time of the second probability variation notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is variable, but if the player continues to hit the game ball normally aiming at the big winning opening 13, the second probability variation notification effect is performed. Tends to be around 8 seconds.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the execution time of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to jackpot symbol A (ie, about 8 seconds) and the execution time of the second probability change notification effect corresponding to jackpot symbol B ( That is, about 8.2 seconds) can be made the same to some extent. Thereby, while being able to execute the second probability change notification effect at an unexpected timing, the execution time of the second probability change notification effect can be secured, and the flow of the effect can be made smooth.

  Although not illustrated in the figure, if no V prize is won during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the character introduction effect is continuously executed from the start of the 9th round game to the start of the ending period. Is done. Then, during the ending period, the same short time transition ending effect is performed as in the case where no V prize is won during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A.

(Flow of production after result notification production corresponding to jackpot symbol C)
As illustrated in FIG. 27C, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, as in the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the result until the start of the round game of the 9R after the end of the judge button effect. Notification production (defeat notification) is performed. The result notification effect (defeat notification) is executed in exactly the same manner in the case where the type of jackpot is the jackpot symbol B and the case of the jackpot symbol C. For example, the message “defeat” is displayed in the same manner for any of the jackpot symbols B and C, or an effect image in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed. For this reason, even if it sees a result alerting | reporting effect (defeat alerting | reporting), a player cannot distinguish which jackpot.

  When the 9R round game is started, the result notification effect (defeat notification) ends, and the character introduction effect is started in the same manner as the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B. As for the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, the same character introduction image and the same introduction sentence image as the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see, for example, FIG. 31 (E)). Execution time is different. Specifically, the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is executed until the start of the 11R round game, whereas the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol C is preliminarily from the start of the 9R round game. It is executed until the start of the defined ending period.

  In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, in the 10R round game started during the character introduction effect, the big prize opening 13 and the V area 195 are short-opened (see FIG. 27C and FIG. 24). ). Unlike the case of the jackpot symbol A, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, the first probability change notification effect is not executed when the jackpot 13 and the V region 195 are opened short. Also, unlike the jackpot symbols A and B, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, the jackpot 13 and the V region 195 are opened short so that it is difficult to win the game ball. No V prize. For this reason, during the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, unlike the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the round image indicating the characters “ROUND10” is not displayed. Further, since the V prize is not basically won, the second probability change notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C.

  As illustrated in FIG. 27C, in the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, a short-time transition ending effect is performed from the start of a predetermined ending period to the end of a predetermined ending period. The short-time transition ending effect is executed in the same effect manner as in the case where the V prize is not won during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbols A and B. The execution time of the ending effect corresponding to jackpot symbol C is 10 seconds as in the case of corresponding to jackpot symbol B (see FIG. 24), and is set shorter in advance than the execution time of the ending effect corresponding to jackpot symbol A. (See FIGS. 27B and 27A).

[About the interval period during the jackpot game]
First, the interval period immediately after the end of the first to 10th round games will be described. In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot symbol, the interval period after the end of each round game of the 1st to 10R is preset to 1 second. These interval periods ensure sufficient time for the game winning ball 13 to be detected by the big winning opening switch 115 immediately before the big winning opening 13 is closed after the closing condition is established. It is provided for technical reasons. As a result, there is a problem that the game ball that has won the big prize opening 13 immediately after the closing condition is established and immediately before the big prize opening 13 is closed is detected by the big prize opening switch 115 after the start of the next round game. Does not occur.

  Next, the interval period immediately after the end of the 11R round game will be described. For example, in the interval period (1 second in this embodiment) immediately after the end of the 11R round game related to the jackpot symbols A and C, a technique for preventing the game ball won in the big winning opening 13 from being detected after the ending period starts. It is provided for specific reasons. On the other hand, in the interval period (8 seconds in this embodiment) immediately after the end of the 11R round game related to the jackpot symbol B, in addition to the above technical circumstances, the execution time of the second probability change notification effect is ensured. It is provided to improve the effect. For this reason, the interval period immediately after the end of the 11R round game related to the jackpot symbol B is set in advance to be longer than another interval period (1 second in the present embodiment) provided due to technical circumstances.

  Specifically, for example, the probability transition ending effect is executed during the interval period (1 second in the present embodiment) immediately after the end of the 11R short open round game related to the jackpot symbol A. The probability transition ending effect is started from the start of the 11R short-open round game and is continuously executed until the ending period (10 seconds in the present embodiment) ends. The ending period can be set in advance to an arbitrary period according to the execution time of the probability transition ending effect. For this reason, it is not necessary to secure the execution time of the probable transition ending effect by the interval period immediately after the end of the 11R short open round game. Therefore, the interval period immediately after the end of the 11R short-opening round game related to the jackpot symbol A is set in advance to a time sufficient for considering the above technical circumstances (in this embodiment, 1 second).

  In addition, during the interval period immediately after the end of the 11R long open round game related to the jackpot symbol C (1 second in this embodiment), the character introduction effect started from the start of the 9R long open round game is continued. Executed. The interval period immediately after the end of the 11R long open round game related to the jackpot symbol C is not a period provided for securing the execution time of the character introduction effect, but is provided for the above technical reasons. For this reason, it is set in advance to a time sufficient for considering the above technical circumstances (in this embodiment, 1 second).

  On the other hand, in the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state immediately after the jackpot game is finished, using the period from the start of the 11R short open round game to the start of the ending period. The second certainty change notification effect is notified. The eleventh round game related to the jackpot symbol B ends when a short open round game in which the big prize opening 13 is opened for 0.2 seconds at the start of the round game is performed once (see FIG. 24). In order to perform the second probability change notification effect more effectively, it is preferable to secure the execution time of the second probability change notification effect by the interval period from immediately after the end of the 11th round game to the start of the ending period. For this reason, the interval period immediately after the end of the 11th round game related to the jackpot symbol B is set in advance to a time sufficient to secure the execution time of the second probability change notification effect and improve the effect (this book) 8 seconds in the embodiment). That is, the time is set in advance relatively longer than the interval period (1 second in this embodiment) related to the jackpot symbols A and C provided due to the above technical circumstances.

[An example of an effect that can be executed before the start of a judge effect]
Next, referring to FIG. 28, the judgment effect starts in response to the case where the type of jackpot symbol is one of jackpot symbols A to C and the final stop symbol is a symbol set other than the seven symbol set. An example of an effect that can be executed before being performed will be described. In FIG. 28, the final stop symbol is a symbol pattern other than the seven symbol pattern, and the flow of effects during the 1st to 6th round games relating to the jackpot of any one of the jackpot symbols A to C, and the effect mode thereof It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example.

  In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit and the final stop symbol is a symbol match other than the 7 symbol match (for example, 1 symbol match), the 7R-th from the start of the 1R round game Until the start of the next round game, the effect during the round for other symbols is executed. The effect during the round for matching other symbols is an effect in which the ally character and the enemy character continue the battle, and the result of this battle is notified during the judge effect during the 7R round game. The basic scenario of how a friendly character and enemy character develop a battle is the same regardless of the type of jackpot symbol. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the V region 195 is a big hit with a long opening or a big hit with a short opening during an effect during another symbol matching round. In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the V region 195 is always opened long so that the teammate character wins in the battle and the V winning is easy. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B or C, the ally character loses in the battle. Then, in the case of a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the V region 195 is opened long so that a V winning can be easily made after the ally character loses. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, the V region 195 is opened short so that it is difficult to win a V prize after the ally character has lost.

  Here, the production during the round for other symbols is an effect that may cause some differences based on the type of jackpot, such as the number of attacks that the ally character applies to the enemy character or the number of ally characters appearing differently. is there. Specifically, in the other-pattern matching round, the number of executions of the “probable change suggestion effect” (the upper limit is 2 in this embodiment) and what kind of ally character (for example, the attacking character C before transformation) It is executed by a production route corresponding to a scenario of a probable transition suggestion production such as whether to appear immediately before the judge production. The scenario of the probable transition suggestion effect is determined, for example, when the 1R round game is started.

  The probable transition suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the higher the number of executions, the higher the expectation that the ally character will win, suggesting that there is a relatively high possibility that it is a jackpot advantageous to the player Production. For example, when the probability change suggestion effect is executed twice, it is suggested that the winner of the battle is an ally character, and the result notification effect (win notification) is always executed during the 7R round game (FIG. 27). (See (A)). Further, it is suggested that the V area 195 is always opened for a long time (that is, the jackpot symbol A) so that the V winning can be easily performed during the round game executed thereafter. In addition, it is suggested that the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is surely set to the probability variation gaming state on condition that the V prize is won (the probability variation mode is the effect mode).

  Further, for example, when the probability change suggestion effect is executed once, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the teammate character will win the battle. In addition, regardless of whether the battle wins or loses (that is, even if an ally character loses), the V area 195 may be opened long so that V winning can be easily performed during a round game executed thereafter (that is, jackpot symbol A Or a possibility of being B) is relatively high. In addition, it is suggested that the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is relatively likely to be set to the probability change game state (probability change mode as the effect mode) on the condition of V winning.

  Probable transition suggestion effects include, for example, “root button effect” executed to increase the expectation that an attack of an ally character (attack character A before transformation) hits an enemy character, and “attack character B (before transformation) ) "And the production of supporting ally characters. The attack character B is an ally character that appears when the attack of the attack character A hits (that is, succeeds) and does not appear when the attack of the attack character A fails.

  Here, the root button effect is a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 immediately before the attack of the attack character A hits the enemy character, and is executed in the mode A described with reference to FIG. Button production. In the root button effect, for example, an effect button image 51 and a gauge image 52 simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the effect button 26 is emitted in white in the normal state.

  With reference to FIG. 28 (A), the flow during the 1st to 6th round games (that is, during the round for other symbol matching) will be described. For example, when the 1R round game is started, an effect in which the attacking character A (one of the ally characters) before transformation attacks the enemy character is executed (FIGS. 28A and 28A).

  For example, when the execution of the “root button effect” is determined in advance as the probability change suggestion effect when the 1R round game is started, the route button effect is executed in accordance with the attack of the attack character A (FIG. 28 (A) Production route from (a) to (b)). In the route button effect, a predetermined valid period (for example, 3 seconds from the start of the route button effect) in which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective is set. When the player operates the effect button 26 within this effective period, an effect that informs whether or not the attack of the attacking character A has succeeded is started in accordance with the operation (from FIGS. 28A to 28B). ) Through (d) or (e). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 26 within the effective period, the attack character A attacks at the end of the predetermined effective period (for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the root button effect). An effect that informs whether or not it has succeeded is started.

  For example, when the appearance of the attack character B is determined in advance as the probable transition suggestion effect when the 1R round game is started, the effect that the attack of the attack character A succeeds after the root button effect ends is executed. . Then, attacking character B appears as a friendly character attacking the enemy character (direction route from (A) (a) to (d) through (b) in FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, if the appearance of the attack character B has not been determined in advance as the probability change suggestion effect, the effect that the attack of the attack character A fails after the end of the root button effect is executed. In this case, the attacking character B does not appear (the production route that goes from (A) (a) to (e) through (b) in FIG. 28).

  In the present embodiment, there is no direct relationship between the execution of the root button effect and whether or not the attack of the attack character A is successful, that is, whether or not the appearance of the attack character B is determined in advance as the probability change transition suggestion effect. . Specifically, the attack of the attacking character A may be successful or unsuccessful regardless of the presence or absence of the root button effect.

  When it is not determined in advance that the root button effect is executed as the probability change suggestion effect (the effect route proceeding from (A) (a) to (c) in FIG. 28), immediately when the attacking character A attacks the enemy character, An effect of informing whether or not the attack of the attacking character A is successful is started. Specifically, if the appearance of the attack character B is determined in advance as the probable transition suggestion effect when the 1R round game is started, the attack character A is performed after the attack character A's successful attack is performed. B appears (the production route that proceeds from (a) (a) to (d) through (c) of FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the appearance of the attacking character B is not determined in advance as the probability variation suggesting effect, an effect in which the attack of the attacking character A fails is performed. In this case, the attacking character B does not appear (a pattern that proceeds from (A) (a) to (e) through (c) in FIG. 28).

  Thereafter, until just before the judge performance (that is, at the start of the round game of the 7R), an effect is performed in which one or a plurality of attacking characters (for example, attacking characters C to E) attack the enemy characters as teammate characters (FIG. 28). (A) (f) to (i)). In the present embodiment, for example, the presence or absence of the root button effect, the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button 26 during the root button effect, the presence or absence of the attacking character B, and the prescribed number of winning prize openings 13 in each round game are determined in this embodiment. A configuration is adopted in which a time difference caused by the timing at which a (for example, ninth) game ball is won is absorbed. Thereby, it is possible to start the judge effect as the 7R round game is started (FIGS. 28A and 28J), and the flow of the effect can be made smooth.

  In the present embodiment, it is suggested that the greater the number of teammate characters appearing immediately before the performance of the judge, the higher the expectation that the teammate character will win the battle. In addition, the expectation level (that is, the expectation level in which the V region 195 is opened for a long time and the expectation level set in the probability variation game state (probability variation mode)) that is a jackpot advantageous to the player (the jackpot symbols A and B) is relative. It is suggested that it is expensive. Furthermore, it is suggested that when the ally character that has appeared is transformed into a strong state, the above-mentioned expectation is relatively higher than when it appears in the form before transformation. For example, when the attack characters C to E after transformation appear just before the judge performance, the expectation is relatively higher than when only the attack character C before transformation appears (that is, the attack characters D and E do not appear). (FIGS. 28 (i) and (f)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28B, an example of a determination ratio of how many times the probability variation suggestion effect is executed in the effect during the round for other symbols is described. For example, when the 1R round game is started, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 determines whether or not to execute the probability change suggestion effect and how many times it is executed. Determine the scenario. For example, the sub CPU 131 determines a scenario at a different ratio according to the type of jackpot symbol by lottery using a probability change suggestion effect random number (one random number for effect control). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a probability change suggestion effect table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 and performs a lottery using a probability change suggestion effect random number (see FIG. 53). The probability change suggestion effect table includes, for example, the type of jackpot symbol, the number of executions of the probability change suggestion effect (including 0 times (no execution)), the type of probability change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, root button effect), It is the table which matched beforehand with the judgment value for comparing with the value of probability change transition suggestion production random number.

  Here, for the sake of simplicity, only the number of executions of the probability change suggestion effect will be described. In the probability change suggestion effect table, as an example, a determination value for comparison with the value of the probability change suggestion effect random number is assigned at the rate illustrated in FIG. FIG. 28B illustrates the ratio of the number of determination values, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the probability variation suggestion effect random number.

  In the present embodiment, the probability change suggestion effect is set in advance so that the possibility of a big hit advantageous to the player is relatively higher as the number of executions of the probability change suggestion effect is larger. For example, when the probability change suggestion effect is executed twice, it is notified that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is being executed. In addition, if the probability change suggestion effect is executed even once, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that it is a jackpot advantageous for the player (that is, jackpot symbol A or B). In addition, when the probability change suggestion effect is not executed, it is set in advance so that the possibility of a jackpot (that is, jackpot symbol C) that is not very advantageous for the player is relatively high.

  For example, the determination value compared with the probability change suggestion effect random number is “none” indicating that the probability change suggestion effect is not executed, “one time” indicating that the probability change suggestion effect is executed, and being executed twice. It is assigned in advance to “2 times” shown. In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the probable transition suggestion effect and the content of the probable transition suggestion effect (that is, the appearance of the root button effect and the attacking character B) are linked, and when the number of executions is determined. The contents of the production are uniquely determined. For this reason, when the determination result of “once” is determined, it is determined as one of the determination result for determining the execution of the root button effect and the determination result for determining the appearance of the attacking character B. become.

  Specifically, for example, corresponding to jackpot symbol A, it is determined to be none at a rate of 30%, determined once at a rate of 60%, and determined twice at a rate of 10%. Specifically, for example, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, the range of “0 to 29” is assigned without, and the range of “30 to 89” is assigned at once. , “90 to 99” are allocated twice.

  Also, corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, it is determined to be none at a rate of 65%, and determined once at a rate of 35%, but not determined twice (that is, the determination rate is 0%). Specifically, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, the range of “0 to 64” is assigned without, the range of “65 to 99” is assigned at one time, No decision value is assigned twice.

  Also, corresponding to jackpot symbol C, it is determined to be none at a rate of 95%, and determined once at a rate of 5%, but not determined twice (ie, determined rate 0%). Specifically, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, the range of “0 to 94” is assigned without, the range of “95 to 99” is assigned at once, No decision value is assigned twice.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28C, an example of a determination ratio of which of the attacking characters C to E to appear in the effect during the round for other symbol matching will be described. For example, the sub-CPU 131 of the production control board 130 has a scenario on which of the attacking characters C to E to appear when the 1R round game is started (that is, the production of the production during the round for other symbols). Determine the production route). For example, the sub CPU 131 determines a scenario at a different rate depending on the type of jackpot symbol by lottery using an attack character random number (one random number for effect control). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to an attack character table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 and performs lottery using an attack character random number (see FIG. 53). The attack character table is, for example, a table in which a jackpot symbol type, an attack character type, and a determination value for comparison with an attack character random number value are associated in advance. In the attack character table, as an example, a determination value for comparison with the attack character random number value is assigned at the rate illustrated in FIG. Note that FIG. 28C illustrates the ratio of the number of determination values, not the determination value itself for comparison with the attack character random number value.

  As described above, in this embodiment, as the number of teammate characters appearing from the start of the other-pattern matching round effect (that is, at the start of the 1R round game) to immediately before the judge effect increases, It is set in advance so that the possibility of the symbol A) is relatively high. In addition, it is relatively more likely that the player character is a big hit that is advantageous to the player than when the ally character is not transformed. For example, when the attacking characters C to E after transformation appear just before the judge performance, it is notified that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is being executed. In addition, when attack characters C and D before transformation or attack characters C to E before transformation appear just before the performance of the judge, there is a possibility that it is a jackpot advantageous for the player (that is, jackpot symbols A and B). It is suggested that it is relatively high. Also, when only the attack character C before transformation appears immediately before the performance of the judge, it is set in advance so that the possibility of a big hit (that is, a big hit symbol C) that is not very advantageous for the player is relatively high. Yes.

  For example, the determination value to be compared with the attack character random number is “C (before transformation)” indicating that the appearing ally character is only the attack character C before transformation, and the attack characters C and D before transformation. “C · D (before transformation)”, “C · D · E (before transformation)” indicating an attack character C to E before transformation, and an attack character C to E after transformation. It is pre-assigned to “C / D / E (after transformation)”.

  Specifically, for example, corresponding to jackpot symbol A, C (before transformation) is determined at a rate of 10%, C · D (before transformation) is determined at a rate of 35%, and at a rate of 50%. It is determined as C · D · E (before transformation) and C · D · E (after transformation) at a rate of 5%. Specifically, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, a range of “0 to 9” is assigned to C (before transformation), and a range of “10 to 44” is set to C · D ( (Before transformation), “45-94” range is allocated to CDE (before transformation), and “95-99” is allocated to CDE (after transformation). ing.

  Also, corresponding to jackpot symbol B, C (before transformation) is determined at a rate of 40%, C · D (before transformation) is determined at a rate of 33%, and C · D · E is determined at a rate of 27%. It is determined (before transformation), but not C · D · E (after transformation) (that is, the decision rate is 0%). Specifically, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, the range of “0 to 39” is assigned to C (before transformation), and the range of “40 to 72” is CD · D ( (Before transformation), the range of “73-99” is allocated to CDE (before transformation), and no judgment value is assigned to CDE (after transformation). .

  Corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, 90% is determined to be C (before transformation), 6% is determined to be C · D (before transformation), and 4% is C · D · E. It is determined (before transformation), but not C · D · E (after transformation) (ie, the decision rate is 0%). Specifically, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, the range of “0 to 89” is assigned to C (before transformation), and the range of “90 to 95” is C · D ( (Before transformation), the range of “96-99” is assigned to CDE (before transformation), and no judgment value is assigned to CDE (after transformation). .

  Note that the effect determination ratio described with reference to FIGS. 28B and 28C is merely an example, and any determination ratio may be used. For example, according to the number of executions of the probable transition suggestion effect or the types of attack characters C to E, it may be suggested only that the jackpot is not very advantageous to the player (that is, jackpot symbol C). In addition, for example, only one attacking character appears when the jackpot is advantageous to the player (that is, jackpot symbols A and B), and two or more players win the jackpot corresponding to any of the jackpot symbols A to C. It may be set in advance so that an attacking character of the character appears.

  In another embodiment, for example, if the root button effect is performed, the attack character A is likely to succeed (or necessarily succeeds), and conversely if the root button effect is not performed, the attack character A fails to attack. It may be set in advance so that it is easy to do (or always fails).

  In other embodiments, the types of probability change suggestion effects are not limited to two (that is, the root button effect and the appearance of the attacking character B), and a plurality of probability change suggestion effects may be prepared in advance. For example, a probable transition suggestion effect in which an effect sound (for example, a cure quinn) is output from the speaker 24 while causing a light emitting element incorporated in the handle 20 to emit light may be executed at the start of the round game. Further, a probable change suggestion effect in which a friendly character (for example, attacking characters C to E) that has appeared in the state before the transformation may be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, during the 6th round game). Moreover, you may provide the probable transition suggestion effect which displays the cut-in image (not shown) which shows a friendly character (for example, attack character C) on the liquid crystal screen 5 intermittently over predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds). In the case of providing such a plurality of probability change suggestion effects, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, six times) or less is determined by lottery using a probability change suggestion effect random number or other effect control random numbers for determining the effect contents. After determining the number of executions of the probability change suggestion effect from (or simultaneously with the determination of the number of executions), it may be determined which probability change suggestion effect to execute.

  In another embodiment, a specific probability change suggestion effect (for example, the appearance of an attacking character B) may be provided to notify that a jackpot (a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A) is determined that is advantageous to the player. In this case, the specific probability change suggestion effect is not executed during the jackpot game corresponding to another jackpot symbol. The player can enjoy the game while feeling satisfied that he has won an advantageous jackpot since the specific probability change suggestion effect was executed.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times of execution of the probability change suggestion effect is two, and when the probability change suggestion effect is executed twice, it is notified that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A. In another embodiment, the upper limit of the number of executions of the probability change suggestion effect is not limited to two, and may be executed any number of times (for example, six times). Further, the number of executions to be notified that the jackpot symbol A corresponds to the jackpot symbol A is not limited to two times, and may be one time or a plurality of times (for example, seven times). In this case, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and C, the probability change transition suggestion effect of any number other than the number of executions informing that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is executed, or the probability transition transition The suggestion effect may not be executed (that is, the number of executions is 0).

  In another embodiment, the possibility of a big hit corresponding to the big win symbol B may be suggested by the number of executions of the probability change suggestion effect. In this case, the period during which the probable change suggestion effect can be executed is not limited to the time when the 7R round game is started, but is executed at any timing from the start of the 1R round game to the start of the 11R round game, for example. May be.

  Moreover, in other embodiment, the determination ratio (refer FIG. 28 (B)) of how many times a probability change transition suggestion effect is performed according to the case where it is jackpot symbol A and the case where it is jackpot symbol B and C ) And the determination ratio (see FIG. 28C) of which of the attacking characters C to E should be made different. In such a case, it becomes a configuration in which the possibility of being a jackpot symbol B during the 1st to 6th round games is not suggested.

[Decision rate example for each aspect of the judge button production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, an example of a determination ratio for each effect mode of the judge button effect that starts from the start of the seventh round game will be described. For example, when the 1R round game is started, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 changes the effect mode of the judge button effect to any of the button effect modes A to D described with reference to FIG. decide. In the modes A to D, the type of the effect button image 51 displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect agent 71, and the state of the effect button 26 are different. For example, the effect mode of the judge button effect is determined by a lottery using a judge button effect random number (one random number for effect control) and at a different ratio depending on the type of jackpot symbol. For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a judge button effect table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 and performs a lottery using a judge button effect random number (see FIG. 53). The judge button effect table is a table in which, for example, the type of jackpot symbol, the effect mode of the judge button effect, and the judgment value for comparing with the value of the judge button effect random number are associated in advance. In the judge button effect table, as an example, a determination value for comparison with the value of the judge button effect random number is assigned at a rate illustrated in FIG. Note that FIG. 29 exemplifies the determination ratio, not the determination value itself for comparison with the value of the judge button effect random number.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is advantageous to the player, the aspect of the judge button effect is set in advance so that it can be easily determined other than the aspect A. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot (that is, jackpot symbol C) that is not very advantageous to the player, the mode of the judgment button effect is set in advance so that the mode A can be easily determined. For example, when the judge button effect of aspect D is executed, it is notified that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is being executed. By such setting, the state of the effect button 26 imitated by the effect button image 51 (the difference between the normal state, the protruding state, and the light emission color), the presence / absence of the operation of the effect agent 71, the state of the effect button 26 described above. The difference suggests the expectation that a jackpot advantageous to the player is being executed. Specifically, it can be suggested that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is likely to be executed in the order of mode D> mode C> mode B> mode A.

  Specifically, for example, corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the aspect A is determined at a ratio of 20%, the aspect B is determined at a ratio of 49%, the aspect C is determined at a ratio of 30%, and 1% The ratio is determined in the aspect D. Specifically, when “0 to 99” is set as the determination value, a range of “0 to 19” is allocated to the mode A, and a range of “20 to 68” is allocated to the mode B. , “69-98” is assigned to aspect C, and “99” is assigned to aspect D.

  In addition, corresponding to jackpot symbol B, it is determined as aspect A at a rate of 80%, determined as aspect B at a rate of 15%, and determined as aspect C at a rate of 5%, but determined as aspect D. Not (ie, 0% decision rate). Corresponding to jackpot symbol C, mode A is determined at a rate of 96%, mode B is determined at a rate of 3%, mode C is determined at a rate of 1%, but mode D is determined. Not (ie, 0% decision rate).

  In addition, the determination ratio for each effect mode of the judge button effect described with reference to FIG. 29 is merely an example, and any determination ratio may be used. For example, it may be suggested that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is executed by executing the judge button effect in a predetermined mode (for example, mode B).

[Specific example of production during jackpot game corresponding to the case of jackpot symbol A and other symbols]
Next, a specific example of effects that can be executed during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol A and other symbols are aligned will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the type of jackpot is the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol is other than the seven symbols.

  When the jackpot game is started based on the winning at the first start port 11, if the final stop symbol is other than the seven symbols, the same effect image is displayed regardless of which of the jackpot symbols A to C The opening effect for other symbol matching is started (see FIG. 30A). For example, when the opening effect for matching other symbols is started, an enemy character appearance image 57 indicating an enemy character that the player (that is, a friend character) should defeat is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as illustrated in FIG. Is displayed. After that, a jackpot title image (not shown) for the same symbol showing the same jackpot title and an opening effect right-handed image (not shown) are displayed regardless of which of the jackpot symbols A to C is supported. .

  When the round game is started, a right-hand hit image that is different in shape and size from the opening-effect right-handed image displayed during the opening effect, and the final stop symbol of the big hit mode are aligned with one symbol (that is, seven symbols). A final stop symbol image indicating that the image is not a uniform image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. In addition, a round image informing the number of rounds currently being performed is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. In the present embodiment, the right-handed image and the final stop symbol image are always displayed from the start of the round game to the start of the ending period regardless of any of the jackpot symbols A to C. On the other hand, the round image is deleted when the special winning opening 13 starts short opening.

  In addition, when the round game is started, an effect during the round for other symbol matching that the battle between the ally character and the enemy character continues is executed (see FIGS. 30B to 30E). In this battle, when the teammate wins, the V area 195 is always opened so that the V winning is easy, and the game is controlled in the probable gaming state on the condition of the V winning immediately after the big hit game. On the contrary, if the enemy character wins, the V area 195 is easily opened so that it is difficult to win the V prize, and the game is easily controlled in the short-time game state immediately after the big hit game. When a big hit game is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed while being controlled in the normal game state, the game control board 100 pays out to the payout control board during the current big hit game. Is not displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  For example, during the 4R round game, the attacking character A battles with the enemy character, and the root button effect is executed immediately before the attack by the weapon of the attacking character A reaches the enemy character (FIGS. 30B and 30B). C)). For example, an effect button image 51 and a gauge image 52 simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the effect button 26 emits white light in the normal state. As a result, the player can recognize that the root button effect has been executed as the first probability change suggestion effect, and guess that the player is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (that is, the probability change game state immediately after the jackpot is finished). There is a possibility. And it is possible to continue the game while raising the expectation for the advantageous jackpot.

  Note that a root button suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of executing the root button effect may be performed immediately before the root button effect. In the root button suggestion effect, for example, the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 may be displayed with an opacity of 100% or less (for example, an opacity of 30%). Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain beforehand the possibility that a root button effect will be performed. It should be noted that the root button effect may not necessarily be executed after the root button suggestion effect is executed, and there may be a case where the root button effect is executed following the root button suggestion effect and a case where the root button effect is not executed (so-called “gase”). . For example, in the root button suggestion effect, if it is not a gusset, the gauge image 52 is displayed together with the effect button image 51, and if the possibility of being a gusset is relatively high, the button image 51 is displayed and the gauge image 52 is displayed. You don't have to. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the route button effect will be executed, improve the effect of the route button effect, and increase the player's expectation for an advantageous jackpot. It can be effectively increased.

  For example, in the scenario where the execution of the second probability change suggestion effect is determined in advance, after the attack of the attacking character A is successful after the end of the root button effect, the enemy character is attacked with electricity. The attack character B to be performed appears (a pattern that advances from FIG. 30C to FIG. 30D). Thereby, the player can recognize that the attacking character B has appeared as the second probability change suggestion effect. Then, the player recognizes that the type of jackpot is a jackpot advantageous for the player (that is, jackpot symbol A), and as long as the V prize is won, the probability variation gaming state (probability variation mode as the production mode) immediately after the jackpot game ends. ) Can be enjoyed during the subsequent jackpot while feeling the excitement of being set. 30B to 30D exemplify a state in which the 4R round game is being performed, “ROUND04” that informs that the 4R round game is being performed as a round image. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the scenario where the second probability change suggestion effect (that is, the appearance of the attack character B) is not executed, the attack of the attack character A fails after the end of the root button effect (from FIG. 30C ( Pattern to go to E)). In such a case, the player recognizes that there is a relatively high possibility of being a big hit advantageous to the player because the probability change suggestion effect has already been executed once (see FIG. 30C). However, it is a little weak. Although the attack of the attacking character A has failed, it is possible to enjoy the game while expecting how many attacking characters (for example, attacking characters C to E) will appear in the future.

  For example, attack characters C to E (before transformation) appear during the 6R round game (see FIG. 30E). Then, the 7R round game is started and the judge effect is started, and the judge button effect is executed in the mode B (see FIG. 19B) (see FIG. 30F). For example, the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 simulating the effect button 26 in the protruding state are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the effect button 26 emits red light and enters the protruding state. As described above, when the judge button effect is executed in the mode B that is relatively likely to be a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A, the player is confident if, for example, the result of the judge effect is a victory. There is a possibility that the production button 26 is operated. In addition, since FIG. 30E illustrates the state during the 6R round game, characters “ROUND06” are displayed as the round image. In addition, FIG. 30F illustrates a state immediately after the start of the 7R round game, so that the characters “ROUND07” are displayed as the round image.

  It should be noted that a judge button suggestion effect may be performed immediately before the judge button effect, suggesting the possibility that the judge button effect will be executed. In the judge button suggestion effect, for example, the effect button image 51 and the gauge image 52 may be displayed with an opacity of 100% or less (for example, an opacity of 30%). The effect button image 51 that can be displayed in the judge button effect can be an image imitating the effect button 26 in the normal state or the protruding state, and therefore, by indicating which aspect of the judge button effect is executed, the judge is displayed. It is possible to improve the effect of the button effect. Moreover, the effect image imitating the effect actor 71 in the state of being placed at the advance position may be displayed to suggest the possibility that the judge button effect is executed in the mode C or D. In such a case, following the display of the effect image imitating the effect actor 71, the judge button effect may be executed in the mode C or D, or may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player have an interest in the aspect of the judge button effect, improve the effect effect of the judge button effect, and effectively increase the player's expectation for an advantageous jackpot Is possible.

  When the judge button effect ends, a result notification effect (win notification) is started (see FIG. 30G). In the result notification effect (win notification), for example, an effect image in which the attacking character (a friend character) that appeared during this jackpot game defeats the enemy character and is proud of the victory is displayed. Also, the message “Victory” and V winning is easy, and if V winning is won, “V Challenge GET” that informs that the game is controlled in the probable gaming state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the probable mode as the production mode). ! "Message is displayed. Note that FIG. 30G illustrates the state during the 7R round game, so the characters “ROUND07” are displayed as the round image.

  After that, when the first probability change notification effect is started at the time of the 9R round game start, for example, a message “Aim for V in the next round!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal prompting the player to launch a game ball into the V area 195. It is displayed on the screen 5. At the same time, for example, an arrow image indicating the vicinity of the big prize opening 13 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as an effect image that causes the player to pay attention to the big prize opening 13 (V region 195) (see FIG. 30H). ). Along with this, a speech of an ally character such as “Aim for V in the next round” is output from the speaker 24. Further, the light emitting elements in the frame lamp 37 and the like in the vicinity of the big prize opening 13 emit light so as to emphasize the big prize opening 13. FIG. 30H illustrates a state in which the closing period is established and the interval period is started in the 9R round game, and therefore, the characters “ROUND09” are displayed as the round image. At this time, the special winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are closed.

  In the 10R round game started during the first probability change notification effect, when a V prize is won, the second probability change notification effect is started according to the V prize. In the second probability change notification effect, for example, a V winning sound for notifying V winning is output from the speaker 24 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), and a V winning notifying image for notifying V winning such as “V” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIG. 30I). In addition, light emitting elements such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect button 26 emit light with a light emission pattern for notifying the V winning. In addition, the effect actor 71 may operate in an operation pattern for informing the V prize and may emit light in a light emission pattern for informing the V prize. Note that FIG. 30I illustrates a state in which the game ball is in the 10R round game immediately after the game ball passes the V region 195, and therefore the characters “ROUND10” are displayed as the round image. At this time, the special winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are long open.

  Thereafter, the probable transition ending effect is started from the start of the 11th round game (see FIG. 30J).

  Since the ending effect is executed during the 11th round game, the short opening round game is performed and the big winning opening 13 is opened shortly, but no round image is displayed. In the present embodiment, during the short open round game in which the game ball is not basically won in the big winning opening 13, the round game of the short open round game (here, the 11R round game) A round image notifying whether or not there is is not displayed.

  In the probable transition ending production, the effect image (for example, an orange background image) suggesting the transition to the probable change mode, the probable change mode, and the time reduction, as in the case of the jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol of 7 symbols. An effect image indicating the name of the effect mode (for example, “RUSH”) and a warning image are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see, for example, FIG. 26F). The player can recognize the transition to the probability-changing gaming state (high probability state and short-time state) by visually recognizing the effect image suggesting the transition to the probability changing mode.

  When the predetermined ending period ends, the ending effect ends, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability changing gaming state (the probability changing mode as the effect mode). Then, for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of variation of the second special symbol. Further, the right-handed image that is the same as (or different from) the right-handed image displayed during the round game is erased after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds).

  In the example shown in FIG. 30, the probability change suggestion effect is executed both in the 4R round game, but the execution timing of the probability change suggestion effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be at the start of the 1R round game or during the 6R round game.

  It should be noted that during the jackpot game, the speaker 24 is selected in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the winning-related role (for example, the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14). A winning combination that outputs a production sound (for example, a sound effect such as a phone) and a winning combination that does not output a production sound may be set in advance. As an example, during a predetermined long open round game, no production sound is output in response to the number of game balls within a specified number winning in the grand prize opening 13, and more than the specified number of game balls enter the big prize opening 13. In such a case, an effect sound may be output according to the winning. Then, a production sound may be output every time a game ball wins the normal winning opening 14. With such a configuration, the player may feel joy by recognizing that he has obtained more than the number of prize balls obtained by executing the jackpot game. Further, it may be possible to output a production sound that can suggest the possibility of a big hit advantageous to the player as a production sound from the speaker 24 in accordance with the winning. Such effect sounds can be output until a predetermined round game (for example, the 7R round game) is started, and may or may not be output during the subsequent round games. . Moreover, you may prepare beforehand the production sound which can suggest that there exists a hold | maintenance which will be determined as a big hit in the special symbol determination hold.

  In addition, it is a big hit in the second special symbol determination that is put on hold by the effect mode of the effect that outputs the effect sound according to the second probability change notification effect or the winning of the game ball to the prize related to the prize. It may indicate that there is something to be judged. Further, it may be suggested that there is one that will be determined as jackpot symbol A or B among the first special symbol determinations that are put on hold. For example, a V winning sound with a stereophonic effect is output when there is something that is determined to be a big hit, and a V winning sound without a stereophonic effect is output when there is only a thing that is determined to be lost. May be.

  It should be noted that during a round game in which the second certainty change notification effect is executed, it may be set in advance so that the effect sound is not output from the speaker 24 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the prize related to the winning. Even during the second certainty change notification effect, after the output of the V winning sound is finished, the effect sound may be output from the speaker 24 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the prize related to the winning. .

[Specific examples of effects during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol B and other symbols are aligned]
Next, a specific example of effects that can be executed during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol B and other symbols are aligned will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the effect during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B.

  For example, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first starting port 11, the final stop symbol of one symbol is stopped and displayed, and the attack character A battles with the enemy character in the jackpot game executed immediately thereafter (see FIG. 31 (A)). For example, in a scenario in which execution of the root button effect is not determined in advance as the first probability change suggestion effect, the root button effect is not executed during the battle between the attacking character A and the enemy character. In addition, since FIG. 31A illustrates the state during the 4R round game, characters “ROUND04” are displayed as a round image.

  Thereafter, for example, in the scenario where the appearance of the attack character B is not determined in advance as the first probability change suggestion effect, the attack of the attack character A fails (FIGS. 28A to 28C). Through (e) through the pattern). In such a case, the player can predict that there is a relatively low possibility of being a jackpot advantageous to the player because the probability change suggestion effect has never been executed. . Then, it is possible to enjoy the game while expecting how many attacking characters (for example, attacking characters C to E) will appear.

  For example, an attacking character C appears during the 6R round game, the 7R round game is started, and the judge effect is started, and the judge button effect is executed in the mode A (see FIG. 19A). (See FIGS. 31B and 31C). For example, an effect button image 51 and a gauge image 52 simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the effect button 26 emits white light in the normal state. The judge button effect of aspect A is an effect that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of a jackpot (that is, jackpot symbol C) that is not very advantageous to the player (see FIG. 29). For this reason, for example, the player may operate the effect button 26 during the judge button effect while being slightly disappointed that the game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game is the short-time game state. In addition, since FIG. 31B illustrates a state during the 6R round game, characters “ROUND06” are displayed as a round image. In addition, FIG. 31C illustrates a state immediately after the start of the 7R round game, and therefore the characters “ROUND07” are displayed as the round image.

  When the judge button effect ends, a result notification effect (defeat notification) is started (see FIG. 31D). In the result notification effect (defeat notification), for example, an effect image in which the attack character A and the attack character C are defeated by an enemy character is displayed, or a message “defeat” is displayed. In addition, since FIG. 31D illustrates the state during the 7R round game, characters “ROUND07” are displayed as the round image.

  Thereafter, when the 9R round game is started, the character introduction effect is started. For example, a character introduction image showing the character to be introduced and an introduction sentence image showing the introduction sentence of the character are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. (See FIG. 31E). In addition, since FIG. 31E illustrates the state during the 9R round game, the characters “ROUND09” are displayed as the round image. At this time, the special winning opening 13 is long open, and the V region 195 is closed.

  Then, during the character introduction effect, the special winning opening 13 (and the V region 195) is closed for a short time (see FIG. 31F). In this way, the player who visually recognizes that the grand prize winning opening 13 is short-opened, temporarily throws out a game ball aiming at the big winning prize opening 13 while being discouraged that the gaming state immediately after the jackpot game is a short-time gaming state. There is a possibility of interruption. FIG. 31F illustrates the state after the 10R round game, and no round image is displayed. For this reason, the player can recognize that the round game after the 10Rth is being performed, but cannot recognize how many round games are actually being executed.

  Thereafter, when the special winning opening 13 (and the V region 195) is opened for a long time during the character introduction production (see FIG. 31G), the player resumes the launch of the game ball aiming at the special winning opening 13 To do. For example, many players who are not interested in the aspect of the V area 195 mistakenly think that the final round game in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C (that is, the 11R round game) has started, and after the jackpot game ends There is a high possibility of launching a game ball while thinking that is a short-time mode. For example, some players who have been paying attention to the mode of the V area 195 can recognize that the V area 195 is long open together with the big prize opening 13, and it is easy to win V. . FIG. 31 (G) shows a state immediately after the grand prize opening 13 and the V region 195 are closed for 1 second after the short opening for 0.2 seconds and the long opening for 29 seconds is started in the 10th round game. Is illustrated. At this time, the round image is not displayed.

  Then, when a predetermined number (for example, the first) of game balls enters the long-open big winning opening 13 (V area 195), as illustrated in FIG. 31 (H), the 10R round game is being played. “ROUND10” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as a round image for informing the user. FIG. 31H illustrates a state during the 10R round game, in which the special winning opening 13 and the V area 195 are long open, and the game ball has just passed the V area 195.

  In the present embodiment, the characters “ROUND10” are displayed according to the V prize, but at this time, the same effect as the second certainty change notification effect is not executed. Specifically, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the second probability change notification effect is not executed during the round game in which the V prize can be won. Further, according to the V winning, for example, no V winning sound is output, and the light emitting element such as the panel lamp 25 does not emit light with the light emission pattern notifying the V winning. In this way, since the second probability change notification effect is not executed immediately in response to the V prize, the player is confused that he will be in the short-time mode after the jackpot game is finished (that is, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C). May continue.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the characters “ROUND10” is an effect suggesting a V winning, and the game is controlled in the probability variation game state immediately after the jackpot game ends (the probability mode is the probability variation mode). This is an effect that suggests. For this reason, the player may be able to recognize that the game is controlled in the probabilistic gaming state immediately after the jackpot game ends when the characters “ROUND10” are displayed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the characters “ROUND10” is controlled to be executable when the first condition that the result notification effect (a victory effect) is executed is satisfied, for example. . Alternatively, the effect of displaying the characters “ROUND10” can be executed when the second condition that the result notification effect (defeat effect) is executed and the third condition that the V winning is satisfied are satisfied. Controlled.

  Thereafter, the special winning opening 13 and the V area 195 are closed during the character introduction effect. When the 11R round game start timing arrives, the character introduction effect ends and the second probability change notification effect starts. As a result, a player who has mistakenly assumed that the mode is the short-time mode after the jackpot game ends (that is, the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C) can recognize that the player has entered the probability change mode (probability change game state).

  In the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, for example, the V winning sound for notifying the V prize is output from the speaker 24 for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), similarly to the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A. At the same time, a V winning notification image for notifying the V winning such as “V” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 31I). In addition, light emitting elements such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the effect button 26 emit light with a light emission pattern for notifying the V winning. In addition, the effect actor 71 may operate in an operation pattern for informing the V prize and may emit light in a light emission pattern for informing the V prize.

  Here, the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is executed during the 10R long open round game and during the interval period immediately thereafter. For this reason, when corresponding to jackpot symbol A, the characters “ROUND10” are displayed during the second probability change notification effect as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, the second probability change notification effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B is executed during the 11R short-open round game and during the interval period immediately thereafter. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 31I, the characters “ROUND10” are not displayed during the second probability change notification effect. In addition, FIG. 31 (I) has illustrated the state which closed in the 11R round game after the special winning opening 13 was short-opened while the V area | region 195 was closed, and the interval period was started.

  Thereafter, when the start timing of a predetermined ending period arrives, the probability transition ending effect is started (see FIG. 31J). In the probability transition transition ending effect, as in the case of jackpot symbol A and seven symbols all together, a rendering image (for example, an orange background image) suggesting the transition to the probability variation mode is displayed. Transition to (probability mode) can be recognized. Then, when the predetermined ending period ends, the probability change transition ending effect ends, and the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the probability change game state (the probability change mode as the effect mode).

  In addition, if the V prize is not won during the 10R round game started during the character introduction effect, the characters “ROUND10” are not displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the game is controlled in the short-time game state immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Will be.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined effect (for example, a result notification effect (defeat notification)) is executed, the character “ROUND10” is displayed according to the V prize, so that the probable game state immediately after the end of the big hit game The case where it is suggested that the game is controlled is explained. The production suggesting the V prize is not limited to this, and any mode may be used. In another embodiment, the second probability change notification effect and the effect of displaying the characters “ROUND10” in accordance with the V prize, for example, a light emission pattern in which a light emitting element such as a panel lamp 25 suggests a V prize is presented. The light may be emitted.

[Specific examples of effects during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol C and other symbols are aligned]
Next, a specific example of effects that can be executed during the jackpot game corresponding to the case where the jackpot symbol C and other symbols are aligned will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the effect during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C.

  For example, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize at the first starting port 11, the final stop symbol of one symbol is stopped and displayed, and the attack character A battles with the enemy character in the jackpot game executed immediately thereafter (see FIG. 32 (A)). For example, in the case of a scenario in which the execution of the probability change suggestion effect is not determined in advance, the judge effect is started in the same flow as in FIGS. 31 (A) to (C), and the judge button effect is changed to the mode A (FIG. 19 ( (See (A)) (see FIGS. 32A to 32C).

  When the judge button effect ends, a result notification effect (defeat notification) is started as in FIG. 31D (see FIG. 32D). Thereafter, when the 9R round game is started, the character introduction effect is started as in FIG. 31E (see FIG. 32E). In addition, since FIG. 32E illustrates the state during the 9R round game, characters “ROUND09” are displayed as a round image. At this time, the special winning opening 13 is long open, and the V region 195 is closed.

  Similarly to FIG. 31 (F), during the character introduction effect, the special winning opening 13 (and the V region 195) is closed for a short time (see FIG. 32 (F)). In the case of a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol C, the V region 195 is opened short so that it is difficult to win a V, so basically no V prize is won. Therefore, unlike the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B illustrated in FIG. 31 (H), the characters “ROUND10” are not displayed as a round image during the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol C. FIG. 32F illustrates the state after the closing condition is established in the 9R round game, and no round image is displayed. For this reason, the player can recognize that the round game after the 10Rth is being performed, but cannot recognize how many round games are actually being executed.

  Thereafter, if the special winning opening 13 is opened for a long time during the character introduction production, the player may think that the final round game in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C (that is, the 11th round game) has started. Is expensive. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the game ball launching aiming at the big winning opening 13 is resumed while thinking that it is the time-saving mode (see FIG. 32 (G)). Note that FIG. 32G illustrates a state in which characters “FINAL ROUND” not indicating a specific number of round games are displayed as a round image during the 11R round game. At this time, the special winning opening 13 is long open, and the V region 195 is closed.

  Thereafter, when the special winning opening 13 is closed during the character introduction effect and the start timing of the predetermined ending period arrives, the short-time transition ending effect is started (see FIG. 32 (H)). In the time-shifting ending effect, for example, an effect image that is different from the probability-changing transition ending effect and suggests the transition to the time-saving mode (for example, a green background image), and the effect mode that collectively refers to the probability-changing mode and the time-saving mode. An effect image indicating a name (for example, “RUSH”) and a warning image are displayed. The player can recognize the transition to the time-saving gaming state (low probability state and time-saving state) by visually recognizing the effect image suggesting the transition to the time-saving mode. When the predetermined ending period ends, the time-short transition ending effect ends, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the time-short gaming state (the time-saving mode as the effect mode).

  The presentation modes and the like of the enemy character look-ahead effect are described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 23, and the presentation modes and the like during the jackpot game are described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 32, but these presentation modes are examples. Needless to say, other things can be used. In other embodiments, the types and number of effects constituting the enemy character look-ahead effect and the effect during the jackpot game, and the determination ratio thereof may be other than those exemplified in this embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an example of processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to realize the above-described effects will be described in detail.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. When the timer interrupt occurs, the game control board 100 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 33 and thereafter is performed in accordance with a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 updates a part (or all) of special symbol determination random numbers (big hit random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, and normal symbol random numbers) by software. A random number update process is executed (step S1).

  For example, the random number for determining the special symbol is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number is returned to “0” and updated after reaching a preset maximum value. Each random number may be set in advance so as to be updated by a random number circuit provided in the game control board 100.

  Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 101 detects that the first starting port switch 111 for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting port 11 and that the game ball has won the second starting port 12. A switch process for determining the state of the detection signal input from each switch such as the second start port switch 112 is performed (step S2). This switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and displays the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the special symbol shown is executed (step S3). In the special symbol process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is large, the jackpot type, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like. This special symbol process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5).

  Subsequent to the process of step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit in the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 controls the big prize port control unit 118 and the V prize port control unit 119 to control the big prize port 13 and the V area. A special winning opening opening control process for opening 195 is executed (step S6). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

  Subsequent to step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S7. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111, as illustrated in FIG. 34, and detects the detection signal from the first start port switch 111. A first start port switch process including a process for acquiring a random number for determining a special symbol (a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number) at the time when is input is executed (step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the second start port switch 112, and acquires a random number for determining a special symbol at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input. A second start port switch process including a process to perform is executed (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal input from the gate switch 114 and executes a gate switch process for acquiring a normal symbol random number at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input (step S23). ).

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 35, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first start port switch 111 is “ON” based on whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input. (Step S2101). For example, when an ON signal indicating that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” is input, it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (step S2101: YES), as the acquired information used for the first special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation A pattern random number is acquired (steps S2102 to 2105).

  Next, the main CPU 101 uses the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 103 as the first special symbol determination hold number Umax1 ("4" in the present embodiment). ) Is determined (step S2106).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S2106: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2107).

  Following the processing of step S2107, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is “ON” (step S2108). At this time, the short game flag is set to “ON” when the current game state has a relatively high probability (for example, 1 / 1.1) that it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened in the normal symbol determination. The flag to be set. The flag is set to “OFF” when the probability of determining to open the second start port 12 in the normal symbol determination is a relatively low probability (for example, 1/12).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (that is, “OFF”) (step S2108: NO), the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process (step S2109). This prior determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the pre-determination process of step S2109 or determines that the time-saving game flag is “ON” (step S2108: YES), the main CPU 101 uses the random numbers acquired in the processes of steps S2102 to 2105 as the first random number. Stored at the top of the empty entries in the 1 reserved storage area 1031 to the 4th reserved storage area 1034 (step S2110).

  Following the processing of step S2110, the main CPU 101 sets a hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 103 (step S2111). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is put on hold, and includes pre-determination information obtained in the process of step S2109. The hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

  When the process of step S2111 is executed, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is not “ON” (step S2101: NO), or when it is determined that the hold number U1 is not less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (Step S2106: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Preliminary determination processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the prior determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 36 is a detailed flowchart of the advance determination process in step S2109 of FIG. 35 and step S2209 of FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the short-time game flag is not “ON” in the process of step S2108 in FIG. 35, or the main CPU 101 determines that the short-time game flag is “ON” in the process of step S2208 in FIG. Whether or not is determined in advance (step S2171). Specifically, when the current gaming state is a low probability state, the low probability jackpot determination table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, the high probability jackpot determination table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. Then, whether or not the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S2102 of FIG. 35 (or the process of step S2202 of FIG. 37) matches any of the determination values stored in the jackpot determination table set in the main RAM 103. Based on the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 39) described later, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is determined.

  In addition, if there is a special symbol determination pending that is determined to be a big win between the time the pre-determination process is executed and the actual jackpot determination process is executed, the gaming state will be before the jackpot determination process is actually executed May change. For this reason, the gaming state when the pre-determination process is executed and the gaming state when the jackpot determination process is executed are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such inconsistency, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 changes the game if there is a hold accompanying a change in the gaming state within the hold of the previous special symbol determination currently stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the later game state.

  Also, when the short-time game remaining number J or the high-probability game remaining number K, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 43, is “0” after the prior determination process is performed until the jackpot determination process is actually performed. The gaming state may change before the big hit determination process is actually executed. Even in such a case, the gaming state when the pre-determination process is executed and the gaming state when the jackpot determination process is executed do not always match. In order to prevent such inconsistency, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines that the short-time game remaining count J or the high-probability game remaining count K is within the pending special symbol determination currently stored in the main RAM 103. When there is a hold that becomes “0”, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the changed gaming state (that is, the low-probability state and the non-time-short state).

  When it is determined in advance that it is a big hit in the process of step S2171 (step S2171: YES), based on the design random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening together with the big hit random number used in the process of step S2171 Prior to the determination process (see FIG. 39), the type of jackpot symbol is determined (step S2172). Then, the big hit variation pattern table corresponding to the current or changed gaming state is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2173). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 and, together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2171 prior to the later-described variation pattern determination process (see FIG. 40). Based on the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening, the type of variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in the process of step S2172 is determined (step S2174).

  Then, the main CPU 101 stores the determination result in step S2171, the process in step S2172, and the result in step S2173 as the predetermination information in the storage area of the main RAM 103 described above based on FIG. 6 (step S2175).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in advance in step S2171 that the game is not big hit (ie, lost) (step S2171: NO), the main CPU 101 compares the reach random number with the current or changed gaming state. Among the determination values for this, the main RAM 103 is a value (hereinafter referred to as “non-reach threshold”) that determines a variation pattern from a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less regardless of the number of pending first symbol determinations. (Step S2176). Of the determination values for comparison with the reach random number value, a value that determines a variation pattern from a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds regardless of the number of reserved special symbol determinations (hereinafter, “reach threshold”). Is set (step S2176). For example, when the current gaming state is a normal gaming state (low probability state and non-short-time state), the main CPU 101 sets 84 as the non-reach threshold and 95 as the reach threshold (see FIG. 10A). .

  Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2171 is larger than the non-reach threshold. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not the variation pattern actually used in the variation display of the special symbol can be determined as a variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. When determining that the value of the reach random number is not larger than the non-reach threshold, that is, the main CPU 101 can determine that the fluctuation pattern actually used for the special symbol fluctuation display is a fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. If it is (step S2177: YES), the non-reach variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2178).

  In contrast, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reach random number is larger than the non-reach threshold, that is, the change pattern that is actually used for the special symbol change display can be determined as a change pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. If it is determined that it is not (step S2177: NO), it is determined whether or not the reach random number is larger than the reach threshold (step S2179). Thus, it can be determined whether or not the variation pattern actually used in the variation display of the special symbol can be determined as a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds. When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the reach random number is larger than the reach threshold, that is, when it is determined that the variation pattern that is actually used in the variation display of the special symbol can be determined as a variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds. (Step S2179: YES), the reach variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2180). As an example, the reach variation pattern table that is referred to when the normal game state (low probability state and non-time-short state) is set includes the reach variation pattern regardless of the number of holds at the time of execution of the first special symbol determination. H10, H20, H23, H26, and H29 are preliminarily assigned determination values in the same range (see FIG. 12C).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol cannot be determined as the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds (step S2179: NO), that is, the reach random number value is actually the special symbol determination. If the variation pattern is 13.5 seconds or less based on the number of reserved special symbol determinations when the symbol is executed (see FIG. 10), the reach variation pattern table and the non-reach variation The pattern table is set in the main RAM 103 (step S2181).

  In another embodiment, the main CPU 101 may perform a process of setting one of the reach fluctuation pattern table and the non-reach fluctuation pattern table instead of the process of step S2181. In other embodiments, if the main CPU 101 determines NO in step S2179, the main CPU 101 does not perform step S2181 (that is, does not set any variation pattern table), and will be described later in step S2182. The process shown in FIG. 36 may be terminated without executing the process.

  The main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S2178, the process of step S2180, or the process of step S2181, and prior to the fluctuation pattern determination process (see FIG. 40) described later, step S2171 The variation pattern type is determined based on the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening together with the jackpot random number used in the process (step S2182).

  Then, the main CPU 101 stores, for example, the determination result in step S2171, the determination result in step S2177, the determination result in step S2179, and the processing result in step S2182 in the storage area of the main RAM 103 described above based on FIG. Store (step S2175).

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 37 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 37, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input following the first start port switch process in step S21. It is determined whether or not the switch 112 is “ON” (step S2201). For example, when an ON signal indicating that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” is input, it is determined that the second start port switch 112 is “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (step S2201: YES), as the acquired information used for the second special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation A pattern random number is acquired (steps S2202 to 2205).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines that the second special symbol determination number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is the second special symbol determination maximum number Umax2 stored in the main ROM 102 ("4" in this embodiment). ) Is determined (step S2206).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S2206: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S2207).

  Subsequent to the process of step S2207, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is “ON” as in the process of step S2108 (step S2208). When the main CPU 101 determines that the time-saving game flag is “ON” (step S2208: YES), the main CPU 101 executes the above-described preliminary determination process with reference to FIG. 36 (step S2209).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the prior determination process in step S2209 or determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (that is, “OFF”) (step S2208: YES), the main CPU 101 obtains the process in steps S2202 to 2205. The various random numbers thus stored are stored at the top of the empty entries in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 (step S2210).

  Following the process of step S2210, the main CPU 101 sets a hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 103 (step S2211). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination is put on hold, and includes pre-determination information obtained in the process of step S2209. The hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8.

  When the process of step S2211 is executed, when it is determined that the second start port switch 112 is not “ON” (step S2201: NO), or when it is determined that the hold number U2 is not less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (Step S2206: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 38, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the jackpot game, and is set to “OFF” at the end of the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the game is a big hit game (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not being played (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). If it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is equal to or greater than “1”. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the holding number U2 is “1” or more (step S303: YES), the holding number U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S304).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the holding number U2 is not “1” or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the holding number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is “1” or more. Is determined (step S305). Here, when it is determined that the holding number U1 is not “1” or more (step S305: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is “1” or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S306).

  Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when the main CPU 101 executes a shift process following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 for the second special symbol determination. While shifting to the storage area 1030, the remaining acquired information is shifted up by one entry. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first special symbol determination reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted up by one entry.

  Subsequent to the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing the jackpot determination process, based on whether the jackpot random number acquired at the time of winning the start opening matches a determination value defined in the jackpot determination table prepared in advance in the main ROM 102 or not. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit. If it is determined that the game is a big hit, whether or not the symbol random number obtained at the time of winning the start opening matches one of the determination values defined in the symbol determination table prepared in advance in the main ROM 102. By determining the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 38, when the starting condition is established that the main CPU 101 is not in the jackpot game and is not changing the symbol, in step S309, the main CPU 101 plays the game based on the jackpot random number acquired at the time of starting opening prize. It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the person.

  Subsequent to the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information determined in step S309, the special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 including information indicating whether it is related, setting information of the change pattern determined in the process of step S310, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like (step S311).

  This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of an effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. Thereby, the variation display of the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal screen 5 is started.

  Subsequent to the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in step S311 (step S312). At that time, when the processing of steps S309 to 311 is performed in a state where the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030, the first special symbol display 41 performs special processing. Starts variable display of symbols. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S309 to 311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random numbers) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the special symbol variable display is started on the second special symbol display 42. .

  Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring a variation time that is an elapsed time from the start of the variation display in step S312 (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process in step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process in step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol determined in step S309 (a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been variably displayed. The special symbol stop display is continued at least until a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

  Thus, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process after the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 as the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time when the measurement is started in the process of step S313 (step S318), and performs a process during stop including a process of starting the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. It executes (step S319). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. The main CPU 101 executes jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S3091). Specifically, when the current gaming state is a low probability state, the main CPU 101 reads a low probability jackpot determination table (not shown) from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a high probability state, the main CPU 101 reads a high probability jackpot determination table (not shown) from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103. For example, in the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table, determination values to be compared with the jackpot random numbers are assigned in advance to the jackpot or loss so that the determination ratio illustrated in FIG. ing. The main CPU 101 matches the determination value set in the jackpot determination table set in the main RAM 103 with the value of the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S2102 of FIG. 35 (or the process of step S2202 of FIG. 37). It is determined whether or not it is a big hit.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 starts such that acquisition information such as a jackpot random number acquired when a game ball is won at the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 is stored in the determination storage area 1030. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). If it is determined that the game is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 and determines the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3091. The type of jackpot symbol is determined based on the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together, and the setting information is set in the main RAM 103 (step S3093). By determining the type of jackpot symbol, the type of jackpot is determined. Specifically, for example, when the symbol random number is related to the first special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 defines the symbol random number in the symbol pattern determination table (not shown) for the first start port. The jackpot symbol is determined based on which judgment value matches. When the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, the main CPU 101 matches the determination value specified in the symbol determination table for the second start port (not shown). The jackpot symbol is determined based on whether or not to do so. For example, the first start port symbol determination table and the second start port symbol determination table are compared with symbol random numbers so that the type of jackpot is determined at the determination ratio illustrated in FIG. 8B. A judgment value is assigned in advance to each jackpot symbol.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3092: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the lost symbol setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). Thereby, in the process of step S317, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed. Thus, the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Variation pattern determination processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern determination process in step S310 of FIG. First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3091 is a big hit (step S3101). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S3101: YES), a big hit variation pattern table (not shown) is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102). The variation pattern table is a table in which a variation pattern of a special symbol is associated with a determination value for comparison with a variation pattern random number, and is a table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 for each gaming state. In the jackpot variation pattern table, for example, a plurality of variation patterns of special symbols for jackpot as exemplified in FIG. 11 are predetermined. For example, the main CPU 101 reads a variation pattern table corresponding to the current gaming state from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), that is, if it is a loss, it determines whether or not to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol from the variation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less. (Step S3103). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines that the reach random number value stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S3091 is based on the number of reserved special symbol determinations with the same winning start port. It is determined which of the determination values for comparison with the reach random number matches.

  When determining the variation pattern of the special symbol from the variation pattern exceeding 13.5 seconds (step S3103: NO), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). On the other hand, when determining from the fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less (step S3103: NO), the non-reach fluctuation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105). In the variation pattern table for reach, for example, a plurality of variation patterns of special symbols for reach loss as exemplified in FIG. 11 are determined in advance. Further, in the non-reach variation pattern table, a plurality of non-reach special symbol variation patterns are determined in advance corresponding to the number of holds.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the processing in step S3102, the processing in step S3104, or the processing in step S3105, determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, and sets the setting information. The main RAM 103 is set (step S3107). Specifically, the main CPU 101 matches the value of the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S3091 among the determination values defined in the variation pattern table. Based on this, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. For example, any one variation pattern is determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. For example, when the jackpot variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variation pattern random number matches a value among the determination values defined in the jackpot variation pattern table. Determine the pattern variation pattern. For example, when the non-reach fluctuation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the number of holds after the shift processing in step S308 based on the fluctuation pattern random number. The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command together with the special symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination processing in step S309 described above, and transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission processing in step S8. . Thus, the main CPU 101 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of step S3091 is a big hit as illustrated in FIG. 20 (step S3191). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S3191: YES), the big win game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3192).

  Following the processing of step S3192, the main CPU 101 sets the short-time game flag and high-probability game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S3193). This high-probability gaming flag is a flag that is set to “ON” when the current gaming state is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/108) that the probability of being determined to be a big hit is set. . The flag is set to “OFF” when the probability that the jackpot is determined is a relatively low probability (for example, 1/320). Following the processing of step S3193, the main CPU 101 starts opening (step S3194), and sets an opening command in the main RAM 103 (step S3195). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control board 130 to perform another symbol matching or 7 symbol matching opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started. 33) is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a big hit (ie, lose) (step S3191: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3196). Here, when it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3196: YES), “1” is subtracted from the short-time game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 103, and the J is updated. (Step S3197). The time-short game remaining count J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in which the time-short state is maintained (the number of executions of the special symbol determination), and a game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed (see FIG. 43). Set in Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

  Following the processing of step S3197, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game remaining count J is “0” (step S3198). Here, when it is determined that the short time game remaining count J is “0” (step S3198: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the short time game flag to “OFF” (step S3199).

  When the process of step S3199 is executed, when it is determined that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (step S3196: NO), or when it is determined that the time-saving game remaining number J is not “0” (step S3198: NO) ) The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is set to “ON” (step S3200).

  When it is determined that the high probability game flag is set to “ON” (step S3200: YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the high probability game remaining count X stored in the main RAM 103, and the X Is updated (step S3201). Here, the high probability remaining game count K indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is performed in the high probability state, and is set in a game state setting process (see FIG. 43) executed after the jackpot game is performed. .

  Subsequent to the processing in step S3201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high probability remaining game count K is “0” (step S3202). Here, when it is determined that the high probability remaining game count K is “0” (step S3202: YES), the high probability game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “OFF” (step S3203).

  When the process of step S3203 is executed, when the process of step S3195 is executed, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is not “ON” (step S3200: NO), or when the high probability game remaining count K is When it is determined that it is not “0” (step S3202: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the suspension process of FIG.

[Large winning opening opening control processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S6 of FIG. Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening control process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This big winning opening control process is a process of executing a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in the process of step S3093. Following the electric tulip process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 42 (step S601). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), for example, after the opening command related to the jackpot game is set by the processing of step S3195 (see FIG. 41). Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening period, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being opened (step S602). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S602: YES), it is determined whether the opening period has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening period (step S603). ). If it is determined that the opening period has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S7.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening period has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds Rmax of the big hit game, the operation patterns of the big winning opening control unit 118 and the V winning opening control unit 119, etc. The setting information is stored in the main RAM 103 (step S604). By executing the processing of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game such as the interval period between the round and the next round described above with reference to FIG. 24 and the ending period after the end of the final round are also set. Is done.

  Following the processing of step S604, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of the game balls to the big winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S605), and the big hit is also stored in the main RAM 103. The round number R is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S606). This round number R is set to “0” before the jackpot start, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S606 is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S606, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (and the V area 195) based on the setting information stored in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S604 (step S607).

  Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring an opening time that is an elapsed time after the opening control is started (step S608). Then, a round start command for notifying that the round game for opening the special winning opening 13 has been started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S609).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the jackpot game is not in progress (step S602: NO), for example, based on the information indicating the point in time in the jackpot game that the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is the final It is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the round is finished (step S611). If it is determined that ending is in progress (step S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S628 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the ending in the jackpot game is not in progress (step S611: NO), for example, based on the information indicating the point in time in the jackpot game that the current state stored in the main RAM 103 is It is determined whether it is in the middle (step S612). If it is determined that the interval is in progress (step S612: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval period set by the process of step S604 has elapsed (step S613). When it is determined that the interval period has not elapsed (step S613: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the interval period has elapsed (step S613: YES), the current round number R of the jackpot game stored in the main RAM 103 is the maximum number of round games set by the process of step S604. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S614). Here, when it is determined that the round number R does not coincide with the round number Rmax (step S614: NO), it is time to start the next round game, so the process proceeds to step S605.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S623: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S615). Then, the main CPU 101 resets the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 103 (step S616), sets an ending command in the main RAM 103 (step S617), and advances the processing to the prize ball processing in step S7. The ending command is a command for notifying that the last round game has ended, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. The ending command includes information (game information) regarding the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not during the interval (step S612: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the round game, and determines whether or not the big winning opening switch is turned “ON” (step S618). ). Specifically, based on the presence / absence of a detection signal from the big prize opening switch 115, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening switch 115 is turned “ON”. If it is determined that the big prize opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S624 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the big prize opening switch 115 is turned “ON” (step S618: YES), the main CPU 101 judges that one game ball has won the big prize opening 13, and the number Y of game balls won Is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S619).

  Following the processing of step S619, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S620). The V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the V area 195 (whether or not the V winning is made). The V winning flag is normally set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 116. If it is determined that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S620: YES), the process proceeds to step S624 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is not “ON” (step S620: NO), that is, when the V winning flag is set to “OFF”, the V winning opening switch 116 is turned “ON”. It is determined whether or not (step S621). Specifically, based on the presence / absence of a detection signal from the V winning opening switch 116, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening switch 116 is "ON". If it is determined that the V prize opening switch 116 is not “ON” (step S621: NO), the process proceeds to step S624 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the V prize opening switch 116 has been turned “ON” (step S621: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the V prize flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “ON” (step S622). A V winning notification command is set in the RAM 103 (step S623). The V winning notification command is, for example, a command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the V winning.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S623, executes the process of step S609, or determines that the big prize opening switch 115 is not "ON" (step S618: NO), the V winning flag is "ON" ”(Step S620: YES), when it is determined that the V winning opening switch 116 is not“ ON ”(step S621: NO), the specified opening is started from the opening of the big winning opening 13 and the V area 195. It is determined whether time has passed (step S624). Specifically, whether or not the opening time when the measurement is started by the process of step S608 has reached the maximum opening period (for example, 29.5 seconds) stored in the main ROM 102 described above with reference to FIG. Determine whether.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S624: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current round game stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “9”), which is a specified number that defines the closing timing of the special winning opening 13, coincides (step S625). If it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the gaming ball number Ymax (step S625: NO), the process proceeds to a winning ball process in step S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the number of gaming balls Ymax (step S625: YES), or when it is determined that the specified release time has elapsed (step S624: YES), the process of step S607 is performed. The opening control of the started special winning opening 13 (and V region 195) is terminated (step S626).

  Following the processing of step S626, the main CPU 101 starts measurement of an interval period that is an elapsed time since the special winning opening 13 is closed (step S627).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S627 or determines that ending is in progress (step S611: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending period has elapsed (step S628). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S615 has reached the ending period set by the process of step S604. If it is determined that the ending period has not elapsed (step S628: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the ending period has elapsed (step S628: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the jackpot game ends (step S629). This gaming state setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  After the process of step S629, the main CPU 101 sets the jackpot game flag to “OFF” in order to end the jackpot game (step S630), and advances the process to the winning ball process of step S7.

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the game state setting process executed in the game control board 100. When the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined ending period has elapsed (step S628: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 43, the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”. It is determined whether or not (step S6261).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S6261: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the high probability game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “ON” (step S6262). Similarly, the high probability remaining game count K stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “150” (step S6263). Then, the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S 6264), and the short-time game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “150” which is the same as the high-probability game remaining number K. Setting is performed (step S6265).

  By performing the processing from step S6262 to step S6265, if a big hit does not occur in the middle after the big hit game is finished, the probability variation gaming state (high probability state and short time state) until 150 special symbol determinations are made. The game will be controlled.

  When executing the process of step S6265, the main CPU 101 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “OFF” (step S6266).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (step S6261: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 to “ON” (step S6267). Similarly, the short time remaining game count J stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “100” (step S6268).

  By performing the processing of step S6267 and step S6268, the time-saving gaming state (low probability state and time-saving state) until the special symbol determination is performed 100 times if the big winning game does not occur midway after the big winning game is finished. The game will be controlled.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 44, the timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described. Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interruption process executed in the effect control board 130. In the following description, the processing shown in FIGS. 44 to 53 is described as being performed by the effect control board 130, but part or all of these processes are effect control board 130, image sound control board 140, and lamp control board 150. It may be executed in any of the above. For example, it is determined whether or not to execute a predetermined effect (for example, enemy character pre-reading effect) on the effect control board 130, and a specific effect mode of the effect determined to be executed (for example, transition effect A in the enemy character pre-reading effect). Or B) may be determined by the image sound control board 140.

  Similar to the timer interrupt process performed in the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 in the effect control board 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 44 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIG.

  The sub CPU 131 first executes a command reception process that performs a process according to a command from the game control board 100 (step S10), and then executes a transmission process (step S30). In the command reception process, a process corresponding to the reception of various commands from the game control board 100 and the lamp control board 150 is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 131 receives, for example, a command as game information from the game control board 100, and sets the effect content according to the received command. For example, the sub CPU 131 determines the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol, and determines whether or not to execute the notice effect that can be executed in the determined variation effect pattern. Then, the sub CPU 131 generates, for example, a command for instructing execution of the determined effect, and transmits the command to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. As a result, the effect determined on the effect control board 130 is executed on the image sound control board 140 and / or the lamp control board 150. The command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S30, the sub CPU 131 performs a data transfer process (step S50). For example, the sub CPU 131 transfers the data transmitted from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150 in order to control (for example, operate) the effect actor 71 and the like. In addition, the sub CPU 131 transfers the data related to the control of the effect actor 71 and the like transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to the image sound control board 140. By performing this data transfer process, for example, the effect actor 71 operates in conjunction with the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or the effect sound output by the speaker 24, or the board lamp 25 or the like. Light emission control is performed. Thus, the sub CPU 131 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 45, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 or the lamp control board has been received (step S11).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that a command has been received (step S11: YES), the command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S2111 (see FIG. 35) or step S2211 (see FIG. 37). It is determined whether or not the command is a hold command (step S12).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that a hold command has been received (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a hold command reception process (step S13). The hold command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S311 (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not there is (step S14).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a change start command (step S14: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a change start command reception process (step S15). The variation start command receiving process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a change start command (step S14: NO), the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 38). It is determined whether or not (step S16). If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a symbol confirmation command (step S16: YES), it sets a variation effect end command (step S17). The variation effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the variation effect based on the determination result of the special symbol determination related to the received symbol confirmation command. This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control substrate 150 by the transmission processing in step S30, thereby terminating the variation effect based on the determination result of the special symbol determination relating to the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. Processing is realized.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol determination command (step S16: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes jackpot game command reception processing (step S18). In the jackpot game command reception process, when various commands (opening command, round start command, etc.) related to the jackpot game transmitted from the game control board 100 are received, a process according to the received command is executed. The jackpot game command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Sub CPU131 determines whether the received command is an operation command transmitted from lamp control board 150 in accordance with the process of step S922 following the process of step S18 (step S19). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27. Includes information indicating whether the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated, information indicating which key is operated when the effect key 27 is operated, and the like.

  If it is determined that the operation command has been received (step S19: YES), the sub CPU 131 is in a predetermined valid period during which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective (for example, 4 seconds from the start of the transition button effect). It is determined whether or not there is (step S20). If it is determined that the valid period is in effect (step S20: YES), an operation notification command for notifying that the effect button 26 has been operated is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S21). When this command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the transmission process in step S30, for example, a process in which the transition effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 26 by the player during the transition button effect. Is realized.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that an operation command has not been received (step S19: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes processing according to the other received command (step S22).

  The sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S22, determines that the command is not received (step S11: NO), and executes the process of step S13, step S15, step S17, or step S21. If it is determined that the period is not valid (step S20: NO), the process proceeds to step S30. Thus, the sub CPU 131 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Reception command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 46, “1” is added to the number of holds for special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133. The updated value is updated (step S131). Specifically, based on the winning start information included in the advance determination information in the hold command, is the hold command related to the first special symbol determination or the hold command related to the second special symbol determination? , And based on the result of the determination, the number of holds for the first special symbol determination or the number of holds for the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S131, the sub CPU 131 analyzes the advance determination information included in the received hold command and stores the analysis result in the sub RAM 133 (step S132). For example, the sub RAM 133 includes a first reserved storage area 1331, a second reserved storage area 1332, a third reserved storage area 1333, a fourth reserved storage area 1334, a first reserved storage area 1335, a second reserved storage area 1336, A 3 hold storage area 1337, a 4th hold storage area 1338, and a hold digesting storage area 1339 are provided.

  In the reserved storage areas 1331 to 1338, the information obtained based on the reception of the hold command from the game control board 100 is displayed, and the special symbol corresponding to the hold command is started to be displayed after the hold command is received. This is a storage area for storing up to. An analysis result (hereinafter referred to as “preliminary determination information”) relating to the first special symbol determination is stored in the reserved storage areas 1331 to 1334, and the second special symbol determination is stored in the reserved storage areas 1335 to 1338. Pre-determination information and the like related to are stored.

  In the pending digest storage area 1339, various types of information stored in the first reserved storage area 1331 or the first reserved storage area 1335 are displayed after the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the information is started and ended. It is an area stored in between.

  When the sub CPU 131 acquires the advance determination information indicating that the winning start port information indicates the first start port 11, the reserved storage region which is the highest of the empty entries among the first reserved storage region 1331 to the fourth reserved storage region 1334. Stores the winning start information and pre-determination information. On the other hand, when the winning start information acquires the pre-determination information indicating the second start port 12, the winning storage area that is the highest empty entry in the first reserved storage area 1335 to the fourth reserved storage area 1338 is awarded. Stores start port information and prior determination information.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 acquires an enemy character pre-reading effect execution random number used to determine whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed and a start target when executing the enemy character pre-reading effect, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S133). In addition, the sub CPU 131 acquires a chance look-ahead effect effect pattern random number used to determine whether or not the chance look-ahead effect is executed and the content when it is executed, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S134).

  In this embodiment, the execution random number for enemy character pre-reading effect and the effect pattern random number for chance look-ahead effect are random numbers that are updated on the effect control board 130 and are acquired when a hold command is received from the game control board 100. A case where the random number is a random number will be described. In another embodiment, the timing for acquiring these random number values is not limited to the time when the hold command is received. For example, the values of these random numbers may be acquired when it is determined that the prefetch effect can be executed (when it is determined YES in the process of step S1371 described later). In addition, a random number value may be acquired when determining a pre-reading effect scenario. As an example, the enemy character pre-reading effect execution random number may be acquired when it is determined that the enemy character pre-reading effect is executable (when it is determined YES in the process of step S1374 described later).

  Subsequent to the process of step S134, the sub CPU 131 executes a prefetch effect setting process for setting whether or not to execute the enemy character prefetch effect and the chance eye prefetch effect (step S135). Then, the sub CPU 131 sets, in the sub RAM 133, icon display commands including various types of information including advance determination information obtained based on the hold command and setting information set in the process of step S135 (step S136).

  The icon display command is a command for instructing execution of a new display of the hold icon, and is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S30. The icon display command includes winning start information, and the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 determines which one of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is held, for example, a prize. Judgment is made based on the starting port information. For example, when the first special symbol determination is put on hold while being controlled in the normal gaming state (low probability state and non-time saving state), a hold icon corresponding to the first special symbol judgment is newly displayed in the hold area 54. (See FIG. 13B-1).

[Pre-reading effect setting process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the prefetch effect setting process in step S135 of FIG. First, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed (step S1371). Specifically, for example, when the setting information of the enemy character pre-reading effect or the chance eye pre-reading effect is already set in the sub-RAM 133 as the setting information of the pre-reading effect, and when the jackpot game is being played, the pre-reading effect is displayed. It is determined that the state is not executable. If it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not executable (step S1371: NO), the process proceeds to step S136.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting information of the chance look-ahead effect and the so-called “gase effect” in which the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the look-ahead target is 13.5 seconds or less is already set in the sub-RAM 133. It is determined that the pre-reading effect is executable. The chance eye gaze, which is an example of a gaze effect, is, for example, a case in which the chance eyes are displayed in a stopped state and the chance eyes are not stopped and displayed.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the prefetch effect is executable (step S1371: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the reserved special symbol determination is a hold that can be made a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. (Step S1372). Specifically, the sub CPU 131 determines a variation effect pattern in which the information indicating the variation pattern included in the pre-determination information is the pseudo-continuous count 0 and can execute SP1 or SP2, based on the hold command received this time. It is determined whether or not the information indicates a variation pattern that can be generated. If it is determined that it is not a hold that can be a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect (step S1372: NO), the process proceeds to step S1379 described later.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a hold that can be a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect (step S1372: YES), for example, the advance relating to the hold of the special symbol determination of the destination stored in the hold storage area of the sub RAM 133, for example. The variation pattern indicated by the determination information is checked (step S1373), and it is determined whether the variation pattern can execute the enemy character prefetching effect (step S1374). For example, the sub CPU 131 reads information indicating a variation pattern stored in the sub RAM 133 based on the hold command received immediately before the hold command received this time. And, for example, the pre-determination information about the hold related to at least one change before the hold of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold command received this time indicates a fluctuation pattern of 13.5 seconds or less, and the jackpot It is determined that the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed when the pre-determination information indicating this is not stored in the sub RAM 133.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed (step S1374: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed, and a start target when executing the enemy character pre-reading effect (step S1375). For example, the sub CPU 131 sets an enemy character pre-reading effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132 in the sub RAM 133. Then, the table, the advance determination information corresponding to the current hold command, the advance determination information corresponding to the hold command received immediately before the hold command received this time, and the processing in step S133 are acquired. Based on the execution random numbers for enemy character pre-reading effects, it is determined at a rate illustrated in FIG. 18 whether or not to execute the enemy character pre-reading effects and how many fluctuations to start when they are executed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines execution of the enemy character prefetching effect in the process of step S1375 (step S1376: YES), the sub CPU 131 stores the current number of first special symbol determination pending in the variation counter stored in the sub RAM 133. (Step S1377). The variation counter is a variable for counting the number of first special symbol determination pending until the first special symbol determination corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetching effect is executed. In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the second special symbol determination is performed with priority over the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 38). If the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination is counted by the variation counter, for example, the value of the variation counter does not change even if the second special symbol determination is executed during the enemy character look-ahead effect. For this reason, it is possible to prevent an unintended enemy character pre-reading effect from being executed for a special symbol determination suspension that should not be a target of pre-reading of the enemy character pre-reading effect.

  In another embodiment, an effect corresponding to the value of the variation counter may be executed. For example, if the value of the variation counter is “2”, a character such as “2” or a predetermined effect image (for example, Two friend characters) may be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. A predetermined effect sound (for example, a friend character's speech such as “2!”) May be output from the speaker 24.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 sets enemy character prefetch effect setting information including the result of the process of step S1375 in the sub RAM 133 (step S1378), and the process proceeds to step S136.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1375 that the enemy character pre-reading effect is not executed (step S1376: NO), it is determined whether or not the chance eye-reading effect can be executed (step S1379). If it is determined that the chance look-ahead effect is not executable (step S1379: NO), the process proceeds to step S136 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the chance look-ahead effect can be executed (step S1379), for example, with reference to a chance look-ahead effect execution lottery table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, the process of step S134 is performed. The lottery using the random number acquired in step 1 is performed, and the presence or absence of execution of the chance look-ahead effect and the content of the effect when executed are determined (step S1380). The chance look-ahead effect execution lottery table includes, for example, whether or not it is a big hit, the number of times the chance eye is stopped and displayed (including 0 times (no execution)), the color of the final effect image (blue or red), It is the table which matched with the judgment value for comparing with the value of the effect pattern random number for chance look-ahead effect. For example, the chance prefetching effect is set in advance so that the chance prefetching effect is more likely to be executed when the prefetching target of the chance prefetching effect is larger than the loss.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines execution of the chance look-ahead effect in the process of step S1380, the sub CPU 131 sets the setting information in the sub RAM 133 (step S1381), and the process proceeds to step S136.

[Variation start command reception processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 48, the change start command reception process executed in the effect control board 130 that has received the change start command transmitted from the game control board 100 will be described. FIG. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command reception process in step S15 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 48, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is the change start command transmitted from the game control board 100 (step S15: YES), the game control board 100 Various random numbers for effect control updated on the effect control board 130 at the time when the change start command is received from are acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 133 (steps S150 to S152).

  Specifically, the sub CPU 131 acquires a random effect pattern random number used for determining the variable effect pattern, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S150). In addition, the sub CPU 131 acquires various random numbers for the notice effect prepared in advance for each notice effect in order to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, and if so, in the sub RAM 133. Store (step S151).

  In addition, the sub CPU 131 uses the final symbol used to determine the combination of decorative symbols (that is, the final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination in response to the special symbol being stopped and displayed. A stop symbol random number is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 133 (step S152). In addition, as the final stop design random number, the final stop design random number for the jackpot for determining the final stop design for the jackpot mode and the final stop design random number for the reach for determining the reach design constituting the final stop design of the reach lose mode To be acquired. Also, a left final stop design random number, a right final stop design random number, and a middle final stop design random number for determining a combination of decorative symbols constituting the non-reach mode final stop design are obtained.

  Note that the timing for acquiring the various random numbers for effect control is not limited to the time when the variation start command is received from the game control board 100. As an example, the final stop symbol random number may be acquired after the variation effect pattern is determined in the process of step S154 described later.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S152, the sub CPU 131 analyzes the change start command received from the game control board 100 (step S153). In the change start command, as described above, information indicating whether or not the jackpot determination (see FIG. 39) is a big hit, setting information of a special symbol change pattern, information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like It is included.

  The sub CPU 131 refers to the variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 132, and based on the variation pattern information included in the variation start command analysis result (step S153) and the variation effect pattern random number. A variation effect pattern is determined (step S154). The variation effect pattern determination table is, for example, a table in which a variation pattern of a special symbol, a variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol, and a determination value for comparison with a variation effect pattern random number are associated in advance. In the present embodiment, a determination result of jackpot determination, a type of jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot, a determination result of reach determination, and a variation effect pattern determination table are stored in advance in the sub ROM 132 for each current gaming state. For example, if the determination result of the jackpot determination executed during the normal gaming state based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 11 is a big jackpot, the sub CPU 131 corresponds to the normal gaming state and the first special symbol. The big hit variation effect pattern determination table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133. Then, the sub CPU 131 refers to the data corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined by the process of step S3093 in the variation effect pattern determination table, and selects the value of the variation effect pattern random number from the variation effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern. The variation effect pattern to which the matching determination value is assigned is determined as the variation effect pattern used in the current variation effect.

  Subsequent to the process of step S154, the sub CPU 131 executes a final stop symbol determination process for determining a final stop symbol (step S155). The final stop symbol determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process in step S155, the sub CPU 131 executes a prefetch effect pattern determination process for determining the start timing of the prefetch effect and a specific effect mode (step S156). This prefetch effect pattern determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S156, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the enemy character prefetch effect target flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is set to “ON” (step S157). The enemy character pre-reading effect target flag is set to ON when the special symbol determination that is the trigger of the change start command received this time corresponds to the pre-reading target of the enemy character pre-reading effect (step S1604 in FIG. 50). This flag is set to OFF when it does not correspond to the prefetch target.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character pre-reading effect target flag is ON (step S157: YES), the combination of the enemy character pre-reading effect and the presence / absence of the notice effect that does not fall under the prohibition condition is executed. Determines the contents of the effect (step S158). For example, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect based on various random numbers for the notice effect obtained in the process of step S151 and the variable effect pattern determined in the process of step S154. In the present embodiment, for example, when it is executed repeatedly during an enemy character look-ahead effect, a notice effect that gives the player a complicated impression as a whole, or a notice effect that is difficult for the player to recognize is not executed. A prohibition condition is set in advance. As an example, during the enemy character look-ahead effect, a line effect (one of the notice effects) for displaying the lines of the friendly characters on the liquid crystal screen 5 is set in advance. It should be noted that after the enemy character pre-reading effect, an arbitrary notice effect according to the content of the variable effect is set in advance.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S158, the sub CPU 131 sets the enemy character prefetch effect target flag to OFF (step S159).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character prefetch effect target flag is OFF (step S157: NO), the sub CPU 131 notifies the user based on the random numbers for the notification effect and the variation effect pattern determined in the process of step S154. The presence / absence of execution of the effect and the content of the effect when it is executed are determined (step S160).

  In the present embodiment, it is set in advance so that the notice effect is not executed during the fluctuating effect immediately before the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect from the start target of the enemy character prefetch effect. Such control may be realized by determining not to execute various notice effects in the process of step S160. Alternatively, even if it is determined to execute various notice effects in the process of step S160, it may be realized by not being actually executed by setting the effect control board 130 or the image sound control board 140.

  When the process of step S160 is executed, or when the process of step S159 is executed, the sub CPU 131 sets a variable effect start command in the sub RAM 133 (step S161). The variation effect start command includes information determined by the processes in steps S154 to S160. The variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 44). Thereby, the fluctuating effect is performed in the manner determined by the effect control board 130.

  Subsequent to the process of step S161, the sub CPU 131 subtracts “1” from the value of the number of holds stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S162). The sub CPU 131 ends the process shown in FIG.

[Final stop symbol determination process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the final stop symbol determination process in step S155 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 49, for example, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the jackpot determination (see FIG. 39) has been determined to be a big hit based on the analysis result of the change start command analyzed in the process of step S153 (step S153). S1551).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S1551: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether the type of the jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol A or D (step S1552).

  When it is determined that it is not a jackpot symbol A or D (step S1552: NO), that is, when it is a jackpot symbol B or C, the sub CPU 131 sets the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode for all the decorative symbols other than the seven symbols. One of them is determined (step S1553). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a jackpot final stop symbol table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and assigns a determination value that matches the value of the jackpot final stop symbol random number acquired in the process of step S152. The decorated symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. As a result, the same decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the left symbol region, the middle symbol region, and the right symbol region in the symbol region 50 of the liquid crystal screen 5 are determined according to the special symbol stop display.

  Here, the jackpot final stop symbol table is a table that is referred to when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, for example, compared with the jackpot type, the type of decorative symbol, and the value of the final jackpot final stop symbol random number It is a table in which a determination value for doing this is associated. In the present embodiment, in the jackpot final stop symbol table corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and C, the determination value for comparison with the value of the jackpot final stop symbol random number is assigned to a decorative symbol other than the seven symbols. Not allocated to As an example, a determination value for comparison with the value of the final jackpot final stop symbol random number in the jackpot final stop symbol table may be assigned in advance so that the determination ratio of the decorative symbols other than the seven symbols is the same. With such a setting, even when the final stop symbol is other than seven symbols, the player's expectation that the game state immediately after the jackpot game may be a jackpot (that is, jackpot symbol B) which is a probabilistic gaming state may be maintained. Is possible.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1553, the sub CPU 131 sets the 7 symbol alignment flag stored in the sub RAM 133 to OFF (step S1554). The 7 symbol matching flag is a flag that is set to OFF when the jackpot symbol other than the jackpot symbol A is a big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol is A or D (step S1552: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode as any one of all the decorative symbols including seven symbols. (Step S1555). In the jackpot final stop symbol table corresponding to the jackpot symbols A and D, the determination ratios of all the decorative symbols may be set in advance so that the determination ratio of the seven symbols is relatively high. May be set in advance.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the final stop symbol determined in the process of step S1555 is 7 symbols, that is, whether or not the 7 symbols are aligned (step S1556). If the sub CPU 131 determines that the symbol is 7 symbols (step S1556: YES), it sets the 7 symbol alignment flag stored in the sub RAM 133 to ON (step S1557), and ends the final stop symbol determination process.

  When it is determined that the final stop symbol of the big hit mode is not 7 symbols (step S1556: NO), the sub CPU 131 sets the 7 symbol alignment flag to OFF (step S1554) and ends the final stop symbol determination process.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined that the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot (step S1551: NO), that is, when the game is lost, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the decorative symbol variation display mode is reach (step S1558).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the decorative symbol variation display mode is reach (step S1558: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines the combination of the decorative symbols constituting the reach lose eye as the final stop symbol (step S1559), and determines the final stop symbol. The process ends. For example, after determining the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) constituting a part of the final stop symbol, the sub CPU 131 determines the middle symbol constituting the final stop symbol. For example, the sub-CPU 131 refers to a reach-losing final stop symbol table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub-ROM 132 and is assigned a determination value that matches the value of the reach final stop symbol random number obtained in step S152. The decorated symbol is determined as a reach symbol that constitutes a part of the final stop symbol. The reach-losing final stop symbol table is a table in which, for example, a decorative symbol type and a determination value for comparison with the value of the reach final stop symbol random number are associated in advance. The sub CPU 131 determines the reach value that constitutes a part of the final stop symbol by determining whether the determination value for comparison with the value of the reach final stop symbol random number matches the determination value corresponding to which decoration symbol To decide. Then, for example, the decorative symbol indicating the number obtained by adding (or subtracting) a predetermined value (for example, “1”) to the number indicated by the decorative symbol constituting the reach symbol is determined as the middle symbol (final stop symbol). As an example, when the reach symbol constituting a part of the final stop symbol is four symbols, five symbols are determined as the middle symbols (final stop symbol).

  In the process of step S1558, when it is determined that the decorative symbol variation display mode is not reach (step S1558: NO), that is, when it is non-reach, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to see the final stop symbol as a chance. Is determined (step S1560). For example, when the flag indicating that the chance look-ahead effect is being executed is set in the sub-RAM 133, YES is determined in the process of step S1560.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the final stop symbol is a chance (step S1560: YES), it determines a combination of decorative symbols constituting a non-reach loss eye from a predetermined chance point (step S1561). The final stop symbol determination process is terminated.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the final stop symbol is not viewed as a chance (step S1560: NO), for example, the sub CPU 131 stores a left final stop symbol table, a right final stop symbol table stored in advance in the sub ROM 132, and The final stop symbol of the non-reach mode is determined by referring to the intermediate final stop symbol table (step S1562). These final stop symbol tables are tables that are referred to when the non-reach mode is lost, for example, a table in which a decorative symbol type and a determination value for comparing with the value of the final stop symbol random number are associated with each other. . Note that the sub CPU 131 determines the combination of the final stop symbols so as not to reach reach misses or chances by setting the final stop symbol table or the like. When the process of step S1562 is executed, the sub CPU 131 ends the final stop symbol determination process.

[Pre-reading effect pattern determination process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the prefetch effect pattern determination process in step S156 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the enemy character prefetch effect setting information is stored in the sub RAM 133 by executing the process of step S1378 (S1601). When it is determined that the setting information of the enemy character pre-reading effect is not stored (step S1601: NO), the pre-reading effect pattern determination process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character pre-reading effect setting information is stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1601: YES), if the variation start command received this time corresponds to the first special symbol determination, In response to the execution of the process in step S1377, “1” is subtracted from the value of the variation counter stored in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1602). Then, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the value of the variation counter is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol determination that is the trigger for the variation start command received this time corresponds to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. Is determined (step S1603).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the value of the variation counter is 0 (step S1603: YES), it sets the enemy character prefetch effect flag stored in the sub RAM 133 to “ON” (step S1604). Further, the sub CPU 131 resets the value of the variation counter stored in the sub RAM 133 to NULL or the like.

  In another embodiment, it is determined whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect is prefetched by referring to the enemy character prefetching effect setting information (scenario) stored in the sub RAM 133 without using the variation counter. You may judge.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1604, the sub CPU 131 acquires a transition button effect random number used to determine the mode of the transition button effect and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1605). Further, the sub CPU 131 acquires a transition effect random number used to determine the effect mode of the transition effect, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1606). These random numbers are random numbers for effect control that are updated in the effect control board 130.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines the aspect of transition button effect as one of the aspects A to D (see FIG. 19) (step S1607). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a transition button effect determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub RAM 133 and based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S154, the transition button acquired in step S1605. The effect mode assigned with the determination value that matches the value of the effect random number is determined as the mode of the transition button effect. In this embodiment, the mode of the transition button effect is determined at the ratio illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines the effect mode of the transition effect as one of the transition effect A and the transition effect B (step S1608), and ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process. For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a transition effect determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub RAM 133 and based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S154, the transition effect random number acquired in step S1606. The production mode assigned with the determination value that matches the value of is determined as the mode of transition production. In the present embodiment, the mode of transition effect is determined as one of transition effect A or transition effect B at the rate illustrated in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the specific effect mode of the enemy character pre-reading effect is determined based on the determination result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the transition button effect random number and the transition effect random number acquired when the change start command corresponding to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect is received from the game control board 100, and the change related to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. Based on the production pattern, the transition button production and the production mode of the transition production are determined. In another embodiment, the transition button effect random number and the transition effect random number may be acquired when a hold command that can be a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect is received from the game control board 100 (for example, step of FIG. 20). Immediately after executing the process of S133). Alternatively, the transition button effect random number and the transition effect random number may be acquired in response to the execution of the enemy character pre-reading effect determined in step S1375. In such a configuration, when the sub CPU 131 determines execution of the enemy character prefetching effect in the process of step S1375 (step S1376: YES), the transition button effect random number, the transition effect random number, and the enemy character prefetching effect prefetch target The transition button effect and the effect mode of the transition effect may be determined based on the prior determination information corresponding to. Then, the enemy character pre-reading effect setting information including the effect setting information may be set in the sub-RAM 133 in the process of step S1378.

  When it is determined NO in the process of step S1603, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the special symbol determination that is the trigger for the variation start command received this time corresponds to the start target of the enemy character pre-reading effect. (Step S1609). When it is determined that the enemy character pre-reading effect is not a start target (step S1609: NO), the sub CPU 131 ends the pre-reading effect pattern determination process.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the enemy character prefetch effect is to be started (step S1609: YES), the sub CPU 131 acquires an enemy character prefetch effect start timing random number used to determine the start timing of the enemy character prefetch effect, The data is stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1610). The enemy character look-ahead effect start timing random number is one of the effect control random numbers updated in the effect control board 130.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1610, the sub CPU 131 determines the start timing of the enemy character prefetching effect (step S1611). For example, the sub CPU 131 refers to a start timing determination table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub RAM 133, and based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S154, the transition effect random number acquired in step S1606. The start timing assigned with a determination value that matches the value of is determined as the start timing of the enemy character pre-reading effect. In the present embodiment, the start timing is determined at the rate illustrated in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when a change start command corresponding to the start target is received from the game control board 100, an enemy character prefetch effect start timing random number is acquired. In another embodiment, the enemy character prefetch effect start timing random number may be acquired when a hold command that can be a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect is received from the game control board 100 (for example, step of FIG. 20). Immediately after executing the process of S133). Or you may acquire according to having determined execution of enemy character prefetching production in processing of Step S1375.

[Receiving process of jackpot game command by effect control board 130]
Next, details of the effect control based on various commands related to the jackpot game transmitted from the game control board 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53 exemplify control when a jackpot game is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the control exemplified in FIGS. 51 to 53 is not executed when the jackpot game is executed based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination. This is because when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol is determined to be a jackpot symbol D at a rate of 100% as illustrated in FIG. This is because an effect (for example, a judge effect, which will be described later) that draws attention to whether or not it is an advantageous jackpot is not executed during the jackpot game. In another embodiment in which multiple types (for example, two types) of jackpots are prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of the second special symbol determination, the jackpot game is executed based on the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Also in the case, a jackpot effect that informs that it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot effect that notices whether or not the jackpot is advantageous to the player may be executed. Then, a plurality of timings (for example, two types of timings) for notifying that a big hit is advantageous for the player may be determined in advance.

  FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot game command reception process in step S18 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 51, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received command is an opening command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S3195 (see FIG. 41) (step S1801). .

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is an opening command (step S1801: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the 7 symbol alignment flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is set to ON (step S1802). . When it is determined that the 7 symbol matching flag is not ON (step S1802: NO), that is, when the final stop symbol is a symbol alignment other than 7 symbols (for example, 1 symbol alignment), the sub CPU 131 plays a jackpot type game. An other symbol matching opening effect start command for instructing the start of another symbol matching opening effect that is executed in a manner that is difficult (or impossible) for the person to distinguish is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the 7 symbol flag is ON (step S1802: YES), a 7 symbol matching opening effect start command for instructing the start of the 7 symbol aligning opening effect is set in the sub-RAM 133 ( Step S1804).

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1804, determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S1801: NO), or executes the process of step S1803, the sub CPU 131 executes step S609 (see FIG. 42). It is determined whether or not the command is a round start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing (step S1805).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a round start command (step S1805: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes round start command reception processing. The round start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1806 or determines that the round start command has not been received (step S1805: NO), the V winning notification flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is set to “ON”. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1807). The V winning notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the V area 195 (whether or not V winning has been made). The V winning notification flag is normally set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening switch 116. If it is determined that the V winning notification flag is set to “ON” (step S1807: YES), the process proceeds to step S1814.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning notification flag is not set to “ON” (step S1807: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received command is a V winning notification command (step S1808). If it is determined that the command is not a V winning notification command (step S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1814.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a V winning notification command (step S1808: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the V winning notification flag to “ON” (step S1809).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1809, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (step S1810). If the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot symbol A corresponds to the jackpot symbol A (step S1810: YES), the sub CPU 133 sends a second probability change notification effect setting command to instruct the start of the second probability change notification effect to the sub RAM 133 according to the V winning. Set (step S1811). This command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S30 (see FIG. 44), thereby realizing the control in which the second probability change notification effect is executed according to the V prize. .

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is not a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (step S1810: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not it is a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol B (step S1812). If the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot is corresponding to the jackpot symbol B (step S1812: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a round image display command in the sub RAM 133 (step S1813). This command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 44), so that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state immediately after the big hit game according to the V winning. As a round image for notifying (or suggesting) that, “ROUND 10” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  When the process of step S1813 is executed, when YES is determined in the process of step S1807, when NO is determined in the process of step S1808, when the process of step S1811 is executed, or when NO is determined in the process of step S1812 If it is determined, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received command is an ending command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S617 (step S1814). If it is determined that the command is not an ending command (step S1814: NO), the process proceeds to step S19 (see FIG. 45).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is an ending command (step S1814: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (step S1815). If it is determined that the jackpot is corresponding to jackpot symbol A (step S1815: YES), the process proceeds to step S1819 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot symbol A does not correspond to the jackpot symbol A (step S1815: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the V winning notification flag is set to ON (step S1816). When the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning notification flag is set to ON (step S1816: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a probability change ending effect start command for instructing the start of the probability change ending effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1817). ).

  If the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1817 or determines YES in the process of step S1815, the sub CPU 131 sets the V winning notification flag to OFF (step S1819) and advances the process to step S19 (see FIG. 45). .

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning notification flag is not set to ON (step S1816: NO), the sub CPU 131 sets a short time transition ending effect start command to instruct the start of the short time transition ending effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1818). ), The process proceeds to step S19 (see FIG. 45).

[Round start command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the round start command reception process in step S1806 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a round start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing of step S609 (see FIG. 42) (step S1805: YES), as shown in FIG. Then, based on the information included in the received round start command, it is determined whether or not it is before the 11R round game starts (step S1821). When it is determined that it is not before the 11R round game is started (step S1821: NO), the process proceeds to step S1833 described later.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is before the start of the 11th round game (step S1821: YES), it determines whether or not the 7 symbol alignment flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is set to ON (step S1821). S1822). If it is determined that the 7-pattern matching flag is set to ON (step S1822: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round effect start command instructing the start of the 7-pattern matching jackpot effect in the sub RAM 133. (Step S1823), the process proceeds to step S1833 described later.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the 7 symbol matching flag is not set to ON (step S1822: NO), the received round start command is a round start command for notifying that the 1R round game has started. It is determined whether or not (step S1824).

  When it is determined YES in the process of step S1824, the sub CPU 131 determines in what production route the effect during the round for other symbol matching when the final stop symbol is a symbol matching other than seven symbols (for example, one symbol matching). Another symbol matching round effect setting process for determining a scenario to be performed (see FIG. 28A) is executed (step S1825), and the process proceeds to step S1833 described later.

  When it is determined NO in the process of step S1824, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received round start command is a round start command notifying that the 7R round game has started (step S1826). If it is determined YES in the process of step S1826, the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round effect start command instructing the start of the judge effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1827), and the process proceeds to step S1833 described later.

    When it is determined NO in the process of step S1826, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received round start command is a round start command notifying that the 9R round game has started (step S1828). If it is determined NO in step S1828, the sub CPU 131 determines that the final stop symbol is a symbol pattern other than the 7 symbols (for example, 1 symbol pattern), other than the 1R, 7R, 9R, and 11R eyes. An in-round effect start command for instructing the start of the in-round effect for other symbols is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1829), and the process proceeds to step S1833 to be described later.

  When it is determined YES in the process of step S1828, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (step S1830). If it is determined that the jackpot symbol A corresponds to the jackpot symbol A (step S1830: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round effect start command for instructing the start of the first probability change notification effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1831). Then, the process proceeds to step S1833 described later. This in-round production start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process in step S30 (see FIG. 44), so that during the 10R round game from the start of the 9R round game. Control is executed in which the first probability change notification effect is executed during the period until winning V.

  When it is determined NO in the process of step S1830, that is, when the jackpot symbol is B or C, the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round effect start command instructing the start of the character introduction effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1832). Then, the process proceeds to step S1833 described later.

  When the process of step S1832 is executed, when it is determined NO in the process of step S1821, when the process of step S1823 is executed, when the process of step S1825 is executed, the process of step S1827 is executed When the process of step S1829 is executed, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the received round start command is a round start command notifying that the 11R round game has started (step S1833). . When it is determined that the received round start command is not a round start command notifying that the 11R round game has started (step S1833: NO), the sub CPU 131 ends the round start command receiving process.

  When it is determined YES in the process of step S1833, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (step S1834).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the jackpot is corresponding to the jackpot symbol A (step S1834: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the V winning notification flag is set to ON (step S1835). When the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning notification flag is set to ON (step S1835: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round production start command instructing the start of the probability change transition ending effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1836). The round start command reception process is terminated. This in-round production start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 44), so that a predetermined ending period from the start of the 11th round game starts. During the period until the end, the control is executed in which the probability transition ending effect is executed.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning notification flag is not set to ON (step S1835: NO), the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round production start command instructing the start of the time-shifting ending effect in the sub RAM 133 (step S1837), the round start command receiving process is terminated.

  When it is determined NO in the process of step S1834, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the V winning notification flag is set to ON (step S1838). When the sub CPU 131 determines that the V winning notification flag is set to ON (step S1838: YES), the second probability change notification effect setting for instructing the start of the second probability change notification effect from the start of the 11th round game is started. The command is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1839), and the round start command receiving process is terminated. This command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 44), so that the ending determined in advance from the start of the 11R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B Control in which the second probability change notification effect is executed during the period up to the start of the period is realized.

  When it is determined NO in the process of step S1838, the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round effect start command for continuously executing the character introduction effect being executed in the sub RAM 133 (step S1840), and receives the round start command. End the process. This command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the transmission process of step S30 (see FIG. 44), so that a predetermined ending from the start of the 9R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C is obtained. During the period up to the start of the period, a control for seamlessly performing the character introduction effect is realized.

[Production setting process during round for other symbols matching by production control board 130]
FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the effect setting process during round for other symbols in step S1825 of FIG. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the production mode of various effects executed during the jackpot game is determined when a round start command for notifying that the 1R round game has been started is received. The timing for determining the production mode and the timing for obtaining the random number for production control (for example, the judgment button production random number) used for the determination are limited to the reception of the round start command for notifying that the 1R round game has started. Any timing is acceptable. For example, in another embodiment, when the round game in which each effect is executed is started, the effect mode may be determined. As an example, the effect mode of the judge button effect (see FIGS. 29 and 19). May be determined at the time of receiving a round start command notifying that the 7R round game has started.

  The sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a round start command for notifying that the 1R round game transmitted from the game control board 100 is started in accordance with the process of step S609 (see FIG. 42). In the case (step S1824: YES), as shown in FIG. 53, a probability change transition suggestion effect random number used to determine a scenario of the probability change suggestion effect is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1841). Further, the sub CPU 131 obtains an attack character random number used to determine which of the attacking characters C to E appears in the effect during the round for other symbol matching, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step) S1842). Further, the sub CPU 131 acquires a judge button effect random number used for determining the mode of the judge button effect, and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1843). The random numbers acquired in the processes in steps S1841 to S1843 are effect control random numbers updated in the effect control board 130.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1843, the sub CPU 131 refers to a probability variation transition suggestion effect table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub RAM 133, and based on the type of jackpot symbol, the probability variation transition acquired in the processing in step S1841. The scenario to which the determination value that matches the value of the suggestion effect random number is assigned is determined as the scenario of the probable change suggestion effect (step S1844). As a result, the scenario of whether or not to execute the probability change suggestion effect, how many times it is executed, and which effect is executed is determined (FIGS. 28A and 28A). B)). In the present embodiment, the number of executions of the probable transition suggestion effect is determined at the rate illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1844, the sub CPU 131 refers to the attack character table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub RAM 133, and determines the attack character random number obtained in the processing in step S1842 based on the type of jackpot symbol. It is determined that the attacking character assigned the determination value that matches the value is to appear in the effect during the round for matching other symbols (step S1845). In the present embodiment, the attacking characters to be made appear at the rate illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1845, the sub CPU 131 refers to a judgment button effect table (not shown) stored in advance in the sub RAM 133 and based on the type of jackpot symbol, the judgment button effect obtained in the processing in step S1843. An effect mode (for example, modes A to D, see FIG. 19) to which a determination value that matches the random number is assigned is determined as an effect mode of the judge button effect (step S1846). In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the judge button effect is determined at the rate illustrated in FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1846, the sub CPU 131 sets an in-round production start command instructing the start of the 1R other-pattern matching round effect in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1847), and the other-design matching round effect. The setting process ends.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 repeats a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 54 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when power supply is started or when power is turned off. Run. In the following description, it is assumed that the image acoustic control board 140 performs the processes shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, but part or all of these processes are the effect control board 130, the image acoustic control board 140, and the lamp control board. Any of 150 may be executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 54, the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 first determines whether various commands have been received from the effect control board 130 (step S500). If it is determined that a command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S502 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that a command has been received from the effect control board 130 (step S500: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes a command reception process that executes a process according to the received command (step S501). The command reception process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S501 or determines NO in the process of step S500, the overall CPU 141 performs a predetermined prefetch effect (for example, enemy character prefetching) based on the setting information of various effects set in the control RAM 145. It is determined whether or not the execution timing of the production has come (step S502). When it is determined that the execution timing of the prefetch effect has arrived (step S502: YES), the overall CPU 141 starts executing the prefetch effect at which the execution timing has arrived (step S503).

  The overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the enemy character pre-reading effect is being executed when the process of step S503 is executed or when NO is determined in the process of step S502 (step S504). If it is determined that the enemy character pre-reading effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S507 described later.

  When determining that the enemy character prefetching effect is being executed (step S504: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the end timing of the enemy character prefetching effect (step S505). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the enemy character prefetching effect, the process proceeds to step S507 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the end timing of the enemy character prefetching effect (step S505: YES), the overall CPU 141 finishes the enemy character prefetching effect (step S506). For example, the overall CPU 141 ends the enemy character look-ahead effect at the start timing of the SP reach effect based on the information included in the change effect start command received in the process of step S5014.

  When the process of step S506 is executed, when it is determined NO in the process of step S504, or when NO is determined in the process of step S505, the general CPU 141 has reached the execution timing of the first certain change notification effect. It is determined whether or not (step S507). When it is determined that the execution timing of the first probability change notification effect has arrived (step S507: YES), the overall CPU 141 starts executing the first probability change notification effect (step S508).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S508 or determines NO in the process of step S507, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the execution timing of the second probability change notification effect has arrived (step S509). When it is determined that the execution timing of the second probability change notification effect has arrived (step S509: YES), the overall CPU 141 starts executing the second probability change notification effect (step S510).

  When the process of step S510 is executed or when it is determined NO in the process of step S509, the overall CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process (step S511). Specifically, the overall CPU 141 transmits data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. Thus, the effect actor 71 and the like are controlled by the lamp control board 150 so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24.

[Command Reception Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S501 of FIG. If the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 determines that various commands have been received from the effect control board 130 in the process of step S500 (step S500: YES), the command corresponds to the process of step S136 (see FIG. 46). Then, it is determined whether or not the icon display command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 (step S5011). If it is determined that the command is not an icon display command (step S5011: NO), the process proceeds to step S5014 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is an icon display command (step S5011: YES), if the icon display command includes setting information of various prefetch effects, the setting information is set in the control RAM 145 ( Step S5012).

  Subsequent to the process in step S5012, the overall CPU 141 executes an icon display control process for performing a process related to the display of the control hold icon for displaying the hold icon (step S5013). Thereby, the hold icon based on the setting information included in the icon display command is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. For example, when the received command is an icon display command related to the first special symbol determination, the hold icon is displayed in the hold area 54 (see FIG. 13B-1).

  When the process of step S5014 is executed, or when it is determined NO in the process of step S5011, the overall CPU 141 transmits the received command from the effect control board 130 according to the process of step S161 (see FIG. 48). It is determined whether or not it is the changed production start command (step S5014). If it is determined that the command is not a change effect start command (step S5014: NO), the process proceeds to step S5018 described later.

  When determining that the variation effect start command has been received (step S5014: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the variation effect start command is a variation effect start command related to a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect. (Step S5015).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is a variation effect start command related to the prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect (step S5015: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines the start timing of the transition button effect based on the information included in the change effect start command. Determination is made (step S5016). Further, the overall CPU 141 sets, as one piece of setting information for executing the transition button effect, setting information for a predetermined valid period during which the operation of the effect button 26 becomes effective in the control RAM 143. Note that the overall CPU 141 measures the effective period.

  When the process of step S5016 is executed or when it is determined NO in the process of step S5015, the overall CPU 141 starts a variation effect based on the determination result of the special symbol determination related to the variation effect start command (step S5017).

  When the process of step S5017 is executed, or when it is determined NO in the process of step S5014, the overall CPU 141 transmits the received command from the effect control board 130 in accordance with the process of step S17 (see FIG. 45). It is determined whether or not it is the changed production end command (step S5018). If it is determined that the command is not a variation effect end command (step S5018: NO), the process proceeds to step S5020 described later.

  When determining that the variation effect end command has been received (step S5018: YES), the overall CPU 141 ends the variation effect based on the determination result of the special symbol determination related to the variation effect end command (step S5019). As a result, for example, the decorative symbol that has been pseudo-stopped in the final stop symbol form determined by the effect control board 130 is stopped (ie, confirmed) in the final stop symbol form.

  When the process of step S5019 is executed or when it is determined NO in the process of step S5018, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the received command is an in-round effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130. Is determined (step S5020). The in-round effect start command is transmitted according to the processing of steps S1823, 1827, 1829, 1831, 1832, 1836, 1837, 1839, 1840, and 1847 (see FIGS. 52 and 53), for example. If it is determined that the received command is not a round production start command (step S5020: NO), the process proceeds to step S5023 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that an in-round production start command has been received (step S5020: YES), the general CPU 141 sets setting information on various types of production (for example, setting information for a probable transition suggestion production) included in the in-round production start command. It is set in the control RAM 145 (step S5021). Then, the overall CPU 141 executes a jackpot effect for the other symbol matching or the seven symbol matching based on the setting information included in the during-round effect start command (step S5022).

  If it is determined NO in the process of step S5020, the overall CPU 141 indicates that the received command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 according to the process of step S1811 or 1839 (see FIGS. 51 and 52). It is determined whether it is a notification effect setting command (step S5023).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is the second probability change notification effect setting command (step S5023: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the setting information of the second probability change notification effect in the control RAM 145 (step S5024), and performs the process in step S5027 described later. To proceed.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is not the second probability change notification effect setting command (step S5023: NO), the received command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 in accordance with the process of step S1813 (see FIG. 51). It is determined whether the command is a round image display command (step S5025). If it is determined that the command is not a round image display command (step S5025: NO), the process proceeds to step S5027 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is a round image display command (step S5025: YES), based on the setting information included in the round image display command, the character “ROUND10” (FIG. 31H) Is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (step S5026).

  When the process of step S5026 is executed, when the process of step S5022 is executed, when the process of step S5024 is executed, or when NO is determined in the process of step S5025, the overall CPU 141 receives the received command However, it is determined whether or not the operation notification command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 in accordance with the process of step S21 (see FIG. 45) (step S5027). If it is determined that the command is not an operation notification command (step S5027: NO), the process proceeds to step S5029 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command is an operation notification command (step S5027: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes a process corresponding to the operation (step S5028). Thereby, control such as starting the result notification effect in response to the player operating the effect button 26 is realized.

  When the process of step S5028 is executed, or when NO is determined in the process of step S5027, the overall CPU 141 executes control according to reception of another command transmitted from the effect control board 130. (Step S5029), the command reception process is terminated. As an example, in response to receiving a probability change transition ending effect start command from the effect control board 130 in accordance with the processing in step S1817 (see FIG. 51), a probability change transition ending effect is generated along with the start of a predetermined ending period. Be started.

[Timer interrupt processing by lamp control board 150]
Next, details of the effect control based on the above-described various commands from the effect control board 130 and data transmitted from the image sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing details of timer interrupt processing performed in the lamp control board 150. The lamp control board 150 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 56 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when power supply is started or when power is turned off. To do. In the following, the process shown in FIG. 56 is described as being performed by the lamp control board 150. However, part or all of these processes are performed in any of the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150. May be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 executes a data reception process (step S911). Specifically, the lamp CPU 151 receives various commands transmitted from the effect control board 130 and data related to the image sound control transmitted from the image sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130. The lamp CPU 151 synchronizes with the effects by the liquid crystal display device 5 and the speaker 24 by performing the subsequent processing based on the instruction related to the control of the effect received in the data reception process (for example, the operation start instruction of the effect agent 71). In this way, it is possible to control the production actor 71 and the like.

  Following the process of step S911, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the variable effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S912). If it is determined that the variation effect start command has not been received (step S912: NO), the process proceeds to step S914 described later.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the change effect start command has been received (step S912: YES), the light emission control of each light emitting element based on the setting information included in the change effect start command, the effect accessory 71, etc. Operation control is executed (step S913). For example, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data based on the setting information included in the variation effect start command from the lamp ROM and sets it in the lamp RAM. Then, by reading out the operation pattern of the effect actor 71 or the like related to the variation effect start command from the set table and setting it in the lamp RAM 153, based on the operation pattern data corresponding to the variation effect corresponding to the received variation effect start command. Execute motion control.

  When the process of step S913 is executed, or when it is determined NO in the process of step S912, the lamp CPU determines whether or not the variable effect end command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S914). If it is determined that the variation effect end command has not been received (step S914: NO), the process proceeds to step S916 described later.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the variation effect end command has been received (step S914: YES), the light emission control of each light emitting element and the operation control of the effect accessory 71 and the like related to the variation effect corresponding to the received variation effect start command. Is finished (step S915).

  When the process of step S915 is executed, or when it is determined NO in the process of step S914, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the operation start timing of the effect accessory 71 has arrived based on the data received in step S911. Is determined (step S916).

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the operation start timing of the effect actor 71 has arrived (step S916: YES), the lamp CPU 151 executes light emission control and operation control of the effect agent 71 (step S913). For example, in the case where it is the operation start timing of the production actor 71 related to the execution of the prefetch operation effect, the production agent 71 is controlled based on the setting information of the prefetch operation production. Thereby, the production | presentation actor | cure 71 starts operation | movement with the start of prefetch operation | movement effect, and the production | presentation actor 71 will complete | finish operation | movement with the completion | finish of prefetch operation | movement effect. Moreover, when it is the operation start timing of the production | presentation actor 71 which concerns on the various button effects (for example, transition button effect) performed by the aspect C or D (refer FIG.19 (C) and (D)), various button effects. The production actor 71 is controlled based on the setting information. As a result, the production actor 71 starts to operate with the start of various button productions, and the production actor 71 finishes the operation with the termination of various button productions according to the end of a predetermined effective period. Will do.

  When it is determined NO in the process of step S916, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether the end timing of various button effects executed in the mode C or D has come (step S918). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of various button effects executed in the mode C or D (step S918: NO), the process proceeds to step S918.

  If the lamp CPU 151 determines that it is the end timing of various button effects executed in the mode C or D (step S918: YES), the lamp control 151 ends the light emission control and operation control of the effect actor 71 (step S919). Thereby, when various button effects are ended according to the operation of the effect button 26 by the player, the light emission control and the operation control of the effect agent 71 are ended accordingly.

  When the process of step S919 is executed, when the process of step S917 is executed, or when NO is determined in the process of step S918, the lamp CPU 151 determines the second probability change based on the data received in step S911. It is determined whether the start timing of the notification effect has arrived (step S920).

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that it is the start timing of the second probability change notification effect (step S920: YES), based on the setting information of the second probability change notification effect, the light emission control of each light emitting element, the effect agent 71, and the like. The operation control is executed (step S921).

  When the process of step S921 is executed, or when it is determined NO in the process of step S920, the lamp CPU 151 executes control according to the other command received in step S911 (step S922).

  Following the processing of step S922, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the effect button 26 has been operated (step S923). If it is determined that it has not been operated (step S923: NO), the lamp CPU 151 ends the process shown in FIG.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the effect button 26 has been operated (step S923: YES), the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command indicating that the effect button 26 has been operated to the effect control board 130 (step S924), as shown in FIG. The process ends.

[Modification]
The above-described effects are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. Moreover, the said embodiment and modification are mutually applicable, and this invention may be implement | achieved by various combinations.

[Modification of correspondence between jackpot symbol and open pattern]
In the above embodiment, the case where the winning pattern 13 and the opening pattern of the V region 195 are uniquely determined when the type of the jackpot symbol is determined has been described (see FIG. 24). In another embodiment, a plurality of opening patterns of the big winning opening 13 and the V region 195 may be prepared in advance for one jackpot symbol. Even in such a configuration, during the jackpot game, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a judge effect) that draws attention whether or not the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won. And it can alert | report at 2 different timings that it was a jackpot advantageous to a player. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 57, a configuration example in another embodiment in which a plurality of opening patterns of the big winning opening 13 and the V region 195 are prepared in advance for one jackpot symbol will be described. In the following description, the description of the configuration common to the configuration illustrated in FIG. 24 will be omitted, and different points will be mainly described.

  For example, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol is determined as jackpot symbol A at a rate of 50%, and jackpot symbol C is determined at a rate of 50%. In this configuration example, the jackpot symbol B is not prepared in advance. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the jackpot symbol A is associated with two types of opening patterns A and B in advance, and the jackpot symbol C is associated with the opening pattern C in advance. It is attached. If it is a jackpot symbol A, the open pattern A is selected at a rate of 80%, the open pattern B is selected at a rate of 20%, and if it is a jackpot symbol C, the open pattern C is selected at a rate of 100%. Is set in advance. Specifically, for example, when a value of “0 to 99” is set as a determination value to be compared with an open pattern random number used to determine the open pattern, “0 to 79” corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is set. ”Is assigned to the open pattern A, and the range“ 80 to 99 ”is assigned to the open pattern B. Further, all determination values “0 to 99” corresponding to the jackpot symbol C are assigned to the open pattern C. For example, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 refers to an open pattern selection table (not shown) stored in advance in the main ROM 102 following the processing of step S3195 (see FIG. 41), and generates random numbers for special symbol determination. A lottery using a single opening pattern random number is performed to determine the opening pattern.

  As illustrated in FIG. 57, until the V area 195 is short-opened in the round game of the 10R, the big prize opening 13 and the V area 195 are opened in the same manner regardless of the type of the jackpot symbol and the opening pattern. Is controlled. In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A and the opening pattern A, immediately after the winning prize opening 13 is briefly opened for 0.2 seconds (10R round game), after being closed for 1 second (round 10R) (Game), long open for 29 seconds (10R round game). In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A and the opening pattern B, immediately after the winning prize opening 13 is briefly opened for 0.2 seconds (10R round game), after being closed for 3 seconds (10Rth game) Round game) for 29 seconds (10R round game). In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C (open pattern C), immediately after the big winning opening 13 is briefly opened for 0.2 seconds (round game of the 10R), it is closed for 3 seconds (interval period), 29.5 Open for a long time (the 11th round game). Thus, the opening pattern B has a longer closing period during the 10R round game than the opening pattern A, and is set in advance to the same length as the interval period immediately after the end of the 10R round game corresponding to the jackpot symbol C. ing.

  By controlling in this way, when the grand prize opening 13 is opened for a short period of 0.2 seconds immediately after the end of the 9R round game and then closed for 1 second and then opened for a long period of 29 seconds, the big prize opening 13 is opened. From the aspect, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to expect the player to control the game in the probability variation game state immediately after the jackpot game is finished (probability variation mode as the effect mode), and to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, if the winning prize opening 13 is opened for a short time of 0.2 seconds and then closed for 3 seconds immediately after the end of the round game of the 9R, the jackpot game corresponding to the opening pattern B, which is the jackpot symbol A, and It is not possible to determine which of the jackpot games corresponding to the jackpot symbol C is being executed. Also, after closing for 3 seconds, the second release period (29 seconds) in the 10R round game corresponding to jackpot symbol A and release pattern B, and the release in the 11R round game corresponding to jackpot symbol C Since the period (29.5 seconds) is very similar, it is not possible to recognize the jackpot type (jackpot symbol A or C) from the open mode of the jackpot 13.

  In such a configuration, if the type of jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is 7 symbols when determined as the open pattern A, the jackpot symbol A in the above embodiment is The same 7-spot matching jackpot effect is executed as when the final stop symbol is 7-symbols. On the other hand, if it is a jackpot symbol A and the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is other than seven symbols when determined as the open pattern A, the jackpot symbol A in the above embodiment is The same jackpot effect is executed as when the final stop symbol is aligned with other symbols (see FIGS. 30 and 27A). On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot symbol is the jackpot symbol A and the open pattern B is determined, the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is determined to be the same as the other symbols, and is the same as the case of the jackpot symbol B in the above embodiment. The big hit effect is executed (see FIGS. 31 and 27B). Then, in the case of the jackpot symbol C, the final stop symbol of the jackpot mode is determined to be the same as the other symbols, and the same jackpot effect as in the case of the jackpot symbol C in the above embodiment is executed (FIGS. 32 and 27C )reference).

[Modification of production during jackpot game]
In the above embodiment, during the jackpot game, an effect (for example, a jackpot effect for 7 symbols and a result notification effect (win notification)) that suggests that it is easy to win a V prize (a jackpot symbol A), and a V prize. It is assumed that there is an effect (for example, a character introduction effect) that suggests that it is a difficult jackpot (a jackpot symbol C). Then, in response to the V winning, the V winning sound is not output and the player makes the player feel uneasy by making it difficult to win the V winning (big win symbol C). B) The effect of the effect during the jackpot game is effectively enhanced by performing an effect (for example, a probable transition ending effect) to inform the player that the player is delighted. For this reason, for example, a probability change transition ending effect is executed after a second probability change notification effect (for example, output of a V winning sound) is executed immediately (first execution timing in the above embodiment) in response to a V prize. As a premise, the second probability change notification effect (for example, the output of the V winning sound) is not executed immediately in response to the V prize, and the probability transition ending effect is executed. In another embodiment, a predetermined effect (for example, other) during a jackpot game is provided on the assumption that the second probability change notification effect is executed immediately after the V winning is performed and then the probability change transition ending effect is executed. In order to emphasize and draw attention to an effect whose appearance rate is lower than that of the production of No. 2), a configuration in which the probability change transition ending effect is executed without executing the second probability change notification effect according to the V prize may be adopted. .

  In such a configuration, for example, an effect for informing the type of jackpot, in order to emphasize an effect during a special round that is different from normal and appears when the “number of consecutive channels” reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). The second certainty change notification effect may not be executed according to the V prize. The “number of consecutive chunks” is the total number of jackpots during a period in which the period of jackpot game is performed and the period of the probability variation gaming state (or the short-time gaming state) continues.

  For example, if the number of consecutive channels is not a predetermined number, the second probability change notification effect is immediately executed according to the V winning, and then the probability change transition ending effect is executed. For example, a V winning sound is output in response to the V winning, and a light emitting element such as a panel lamp 25 emits light with a light emission pattern (for example, rainbow color) notifying the V winning. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive channels is a predetermined number, no V winning sound is output even if V is won in order to emphasize a special round effect different from normal. Further, the light emitting elements such as the panel lamp 25 continue to emit light with the light emission pattern of the special round effect without emitting light with the light emission pattern for notifying the V prize even when winning V. That is, in the same way as the jackpot effect (corresponding to the jackpot effect shown in FIG. 31) corresponding to the jackpot symbol B in the above embodiment, for example, the V winning sound is not output according to the V prize, and the board lamp 25 or the like. The light emitting element does not emit light with a light emitting pattern for notifying V winning. Note that it is only necessary to be able to emphasize the special round effect, and in the same way as suggesting the V prize by displaying the round image according to the V prize during the character introduction effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B in the above embodiment, the second An effect different from the probability change notification effect (for example, displaying the letter “V” in a small size) may be executed in response to the V prize to suggest a V prize.

  In another embodiment, the gaming state immediately after the end of the jackpot game may be notified (or suggested) at the end of the jackpot game. In this case, for example, during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the same (or very similar) effect as the jackpot symbol effect related to the jackpot symbol C described above is executed. That is, even if V is won during the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the second probability change notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game. Then, as the ending effect corresponding to the jackpot symbol B, the time-shifting ending effect is executed. Even if it is controlled to the probability variation game state (high probability state and short time state) until the number of special symbol judgments immediately after the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the short time game remaining number of times J “100”), the short time game The fluctuating effect is executed in the same time reduction mode as when the state is controlled (low probability state and time reduction state). Then, when the number of special symbol determinations reaches a predetermined number, an effect that suggests a gaming state is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation that the game state may be advantageous to the player even after the jackpot game ends.

[Modification of enemy character look-ahead production]
In the above-described embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect is executed from the variation effect before the pre-read target variation effect is started to during the pre-read target variation effect. In another embodiment, it may be executed in one or a predetermined number of times (for example, two times) of changing effects in a plurality of changing effects before the pre-reading changing effect is started. In this case, when it is determined that the enemy character pre-reading effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 may determine the number of fluctuation effects to be executed by random number lottery.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed based on the advance determination information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol that can determine the variation effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. In another embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be executable based on prior determination information indicating any variation pattern. For example, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be executable based on pre-determination information indicating a variation pattern capable of determining a variation effect pattern capable of executing a pseudo continuous effect. In this case, since a variation effect pattern having a larger number of pseudo-continuations is more likely to be determined for a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time, the longer the time until the reach is established, the more the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the more reliable the jackpot is. Relatively high. For example, it can be suggested that the longer the time from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading object to the end of the enemy character pre-reading effect and the start of the SP reach effect, the higher the reliability. That is, it can be suggested that the reliability is relatively higher as the execution time of the pre-reading operation effect from the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the pre-reading target is longer. Thereby, the player can recognize that the reliability is relatively high due to the long operation time of the director 71 and the large rotation angle of the enemy character image 56.

  In the said embodiment, based on prior determination information, it demonstrated as an enemy character pre-reading effect being performed before 1-3 changes of pre-reading object. In another embodiment, an effect similar to the enemy character pre-reading effect may be executed during the period from when the special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner until the special symbol is stopped based on the determination result of the special symbol determination.

  In another embodiment, for example, the stage actor 71 is operated while the decorative symbol is variably displayed, and the stage actor 71 is in the initial position while the decorative symbol is stopped (or pseudo-stopped). You may return to. In such a configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the decorative symbol has been stopped and displayed, and thus it is easy to recognize how many times the enemy character pre-reading effect has been executed.

  In the above embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect is described as being executed in the order of the screen reduction effect, the pre-reading operation effect, the transition button effect, and the transition effect, but the configuration of the enemy character pre-reading effect is not limited to this. In another embodiment, the enemy character pre-reading effect may be composed of a part of the screen reduction effect, the pre-reading operation effect, the transition button effect, and the transition effect, for example, only the pre-reading effect effect. May be.

  In other embodiments, an effect suggesting the possibility of executing an enemy character prefetching effect may be executed. For example, it may be possible to execute a step-up effect in which the constituent members 71aL, 71aR, 71bL, and 71bR constituting the effect actor 71 are operated step by step up to a predetermined number of steps (for example, 3). Then, the possibility that the enemy character look-ahead effect is executed may be suggested depending on how many stages are developed in this step-up effect. For example, in the first stage of the step-up effect, the constituent members 71aL and 71aR are moved from the initial position to the advanced position. In the second stage, the structural member 71bL is moved from the initial position to the advanced position while the structural members 71aL and 71aR are still in the advanced position, and in the third stage, the structural members 71aL, 71aR, and 71bL are moved to the advanced position. Further, the component member 71bR is further moved from the initial position to the advanced position in the state where it is disposed at the position. For example, an enemy character look-ahead effect is always started if it develops to the third stage, and an enemy character look-ahead effect is started or not started (a so-called “gase step-up effect”) unless it progresses to the third stage. May be.

  Further, for example, the enemy character pre-reading effect can be executed by executing a screen suggestion effect that intermittently displays the screen reduced image 55 or the effect image imitating the effect actor 71 placed at the advance position. May suggest sex. As an example, the screen reduced image 55 is intermittently displayed with an opacity of 100% or less (for example, 60% opacity), and when the opacity of the screen reduced image 55 reaches 100%, the enemy character pre-reading effect is started, and the screen If the opacity of the reduced image 55 does not reach 100%, the enemy character pre-reading effect does not have to be started during the changing effect (so-called gas screen suggestion effect).

  After the step-up effect for gasses and the screen suggestion effect for gasses, the enemy character look-ahead effect does not have to be executed during the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol determination that was held at the start of these effects (gasse ), An enemy character look-ahead effect may be executed (that is, it was not a frustration). For example, after the end of the screen suggestion effect that ends when the opacity of the screen reduced image 55 is 100% or less, during the start or execution of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol determination that was held at the start of the screen suggestion effect, For example, an effect after the pre-reading action effect in the enemy character pre-reading effect may be executed and directly develop into SP1 or SP2. By executing the enemy character pre-reading effect in this manner, even if the enemy character pre-reading effect is not executed immediately after the end of the step-up effect and the screen suggestion effect, there is a possibility that it will be executed after that, SP1 Alternatively, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation that SP2 may be executed and to increase the effect of the enemy character look-ahead effect. In addition, the enemy character look-ahead effect may not be executed after the step-up effect and the screen suggestion effect (gase), so the anxiety that it may have been performed in spite of not executing SP1 or SP2 is suspended. It can be given occasionally, and it is possible to effectively enhance the effects of step-up effect, screen suggestion effect, and enemy character pre-reading effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the SP reach effect (SP1 or SP2) is notified by the enemy character look-ahead effect. In another embodiment, the enemy character look-ahead effect may suggest that the possibility that the SP reach effect is executed is relatively high, and does not directly develop into the SP reach effect immediately after the enemy character look-ahead effect ends. Loss may be notified as it is.

  Further, the effect suggested by the enemy character pre-reading effect is not limited to the SP reach effect, but may be any effect. For example, the enemy character pre-reading effect may suggest that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice, or a predetermined notice effect (for example, a group notice effect) with relatively high reliability for the jackpot is executed. May suggest.

In another embodiment, when it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol A and is a prefetch target of the enemy character prefetch effect, the final stop symbol may be determined as seven symbols.

  Note that the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example. However, the present invention is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

[Configuration of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effects]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. The parentheses are merely examples.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a special game determining means (for example, 100) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game corresponding to one of the jackpot symbols A to D) when the start condition is established. And a special game execution means (for example, 100) for executing the special game when the special game is determined to be performed, and a game state setting for setting the game state after the special game ends. Means (eg, 100) and production control means (eg, 130) for controlling the production, and the special game includes a first game ball that is likely to pass through a specific area (eg, 195) during execution of the special game. A special game (for example, a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol A or B) and a second special game (for example, a jackpot symbol for which the game ball is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first special game) If the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the special game, the game state setting means has a high probability that the game state after the end of the special game is advantageous to the player. The game state (for example, a high probability state and a short time state) can be set, and the effect control means is configured to make a special game effect (for example, jackpot symbol A or B and other symbols uniform during execution of the first special game). Corresponding other symbol matching jackpot effect) and a specific effect (for example, a second probability change notification effect) that can recognize that the game ball has passed the specific area can be executed, and the special game effect includes The first effect mode (for example, jackpot symbol A and other symbol matching corresponding to the other symbol matching) in which the region notification effect (for example, the first probability change notification effect) that prompts the player to launch the game ball in the specific region is performed. Large And a second effect mode in which the area notification effect is not performed (for example, a jackpot effect for another symbol matching corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and another symbol matching), and the special game effect is the When performed in the first effect mode, the specific effect is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, the first execution timing) after the game ball passes through the specific area, while the special game effect is generated in the second effect mode. When performed, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the specific effect is not performed at the predetermined timing (for example, when the jackpot effect for another symbol matching corresponding to the jackpot symbol A and the other symbol alignment is performed) The second certainty change notification effect is executed at the first execution timing according to the V prize, whereas the jackpot effect for the other symbol matching corresponding to the jackpot symbol B and the other symbol matching is performed. If performed, the second certainty change notification effect will not be executed at the first execution timing even if V is won. )

  According to the above configuration, when the special game effect is performed in the second effect mode, even if the game ball passes the specific region, the game ball is in the specific region when the special game effect is performed in the first effect mode. The specific effect is not executed at a predetermined timing when the specific effect is executed after passing through. Since whether or not the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing depends on the effect mode of the special game effect, the specific effect can be performed more effectively while enhancing the effect of the special game effect.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention executes a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquisition means (for example, 100) for acquiring the acquisition information in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the determination result by the special game determination means (for example, 100) and the special game determination means for determining whether to perform or not, the determination result by the special game determination means is displayed by suspending the display after the symbols are variably displayed. Prior determination to determine whether or not to execute the special game based on the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit prior to determination by the symbol change unit (for example, 100) to be notified and the special game determination unit Means (S2109 in FIG. 35 and S2209 in FIG. 37) and effect control means (for example, 130) for controlling the effect. Based on the determination result by the special game determination means, a predetermined effect (for example, a decorative pattern change display) started in response to the symbol change display by the symbol change means and ended in response to the symbol stop display. It is possible to execute an action effect (for example, enemy character pre-reading effect) for operating a movable accessory (for example, 71) based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means, Variation of the decorative pattern related to the start target of the enemy character pre-reading effect (for example, the target target of the enemy character pre-reading effect) It is possible to execute the action effect intermittently or continuously over one or more continuously executed predetermined effects from the display) to the target predetermined effect. (E.g., at least variation before the enemy character prefetch effect of such a prefetched decorative symbol variation display effect combination continues until midsole 71 is operated.).

  According to the above configuration, the operation effect is performed from one or more continuously executed predetermined effects to the target predetermined effect. Thereby, it is easy to understand which predetermined production is the target predetermined production, and the production can be performed more effectively.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 5 Liquid crystal display device 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Large winning opening 14 Normal winning opening 24 Speaker 26 Direction button 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd special symbol display 71 Directing actor 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
150 Lamp control board 151 Lamp CPU
195 V region

Claims (1)

Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information in response to establishment of an acquisition condition;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means;
When the determination by the special game determination means is performed, the symbol variation means for notifying the determination result of the determination by causing the symbol to be variably displayed and then stopping the display,
Prior to determination by the special game determination unit, based on the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit, prior determination unit for determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game;
Production control means for controlling the production,
The production control means includes
Based on a determination result of the special game determination means, notifying the judgment result by performing a predetermined effect since the varying display start of by Ri the symbols in the symbol variation means until the symbols are stopped and displayed When the determination result is a predetermined result, the first predetermined effect that does not execute the reach effect or the second predetermined effect that executes the reach effect can be executed.
Based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means, one or a plurality of priors that are predetermined effects that are executed before the target predetermined effect that is a predetermined effect corresponding to the acquisition information that is the target of the prior determination. during execution of a predetermined effect, Ri executable Nodea intermittently or continuously operating effect of operating the movable won game,
Before the operation effect is performed, a running available-suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the operation effect is performed using the movable won game,
When there is the second predetermined effect among the plurality of the predetermined predetermined effects, the operation effect is generated during the execution of the first predetermined effect that is a prior predetermined effect that is executed after the second predetermined effect. Is possible and
When two or more of the plurality of the predetermined predetermined effects are the first predetermined effects, the second start is different from the case where the operation effect is executed at the first start timing and the first start timing. A gaming machine, wherein the degree of expectation that is notified by the target predetermined effect that the determination result is to execute the special game is different from the case where the operation effect is executed at a timing .

Images